Home

User Manual%>

1. Example Data MODFLOW Sample Run 1 MODFLOW 2005 Conceptual Run start date and time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 2012 03 28 17 20 01 PERIOD 1 STEP 1 1 Solving Stress penod 1 Timestep 1 Ground Water Flow Eqn STR Residual 1 682528 Change 3 9596923E 04 STR Residual 6 7673293E 03 Change 5 1476450E 06 STR Residual 7 6184729E 03 Change 5 9273425E 06 STR Residual 7 5043496 03 Change 4 1847698E 06 STR Residual 8 7449821E 03 Change 5 4644079E 06 STR Residual 7 6131127E 03 Change 9 6827453E 06 STR Residual 6 0292291E 03 Change 1 1286843E 05 Run end date and time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 2012 03 28 17 20 01 Elapsed run time 0 241 Seconds Normal termination of simulation i C InitialHeads J u 7 a 1 Boundary Conditions Iterations Constant Heads Chines C Constant Head 1 Constant Head West s 2D DDE 2DE 4 0E 6 06 C Storage Storage1 InitialHeads1 C Boundary Conditions Constant Heads Z Constant Head 1 L Z Constant Head West 5 1 0 15 2B 25 allio z 7 kerations 3D Viewer 1 Conceptual Model NumericalGridl Run Sample Run1 When the run completes the Heads and Drawdown nodes will be added to the Output folder on the model tree 10 12 View Results At
2. e For this scenario the default objectives will be fine 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help e Click Next Step to proceed Collect Data Objects e The next step is to import or create the data objects you wish to use for building the conceptual model Visual MODFLOW Flex Example Conceptual Model W9 File Tools Window Help Workflow 8x Dade Data z 200k E GIS 00000005 T Import Data Create New Data Object Model Explorer Create Surface At this step you can import data create new data objects by digitizing or create surfaces from points data objects e Click the Import Data button and the following screen will load p Data Source Data Type Point Source File Name Description lt Back ne gt gt cancel Help 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 22 e Select Polygon in Data Type combo box e In the Source File field click the button and navigate to your My Documents folder then VMODFlex Tutorials ConceptualModel select folder Polygons and select boundary shp e Click Next gt gt xl abouts Date Presin 1D EDMARK_0 WIDTH TYPE er it of ol a oa 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 HHHHHHE lt Back Ne
3. The Cells node allows you to specify style settings for the grid cells The following options are available The Show Cell check box allows you to show hide the grid cells in the 3D gridded data object When the check box is selected you can choose how to show the cells in the Color combo box in the Fill Settings frame With the Specified option select the adjacent color swatch and select the desired color to fill the cells If you select Color by Attribute you can color each cell according to a specified attribute e g heads Color by attribute settings can be defined by selecting the Color node located under the Cells node For more information on the color by attribute feature please refer to Color By Attributelisar section The Show only Active Zone check box allows you to show hide inactive grid cells 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings Vertices Lines For information on the settings available in the Vertices and Lines nodes please refer the Points Vertices ha and Lines 143 respectively Slice E Settings 2 8 E General General E Cells Vertices Lines 5 Slice E Show Slice V Use virtual grid General Colors Slice Settings Colormap Sie fan C AutoApply lsolines Row X lsosurfaces Row Number 1 75 1 U Fill Settings ByAttribute aL Transparency 0 E Show Legend E Wireframe Ay J OK J Canc
4. it Conceptual Model NumericalGridl Run Uniform Grid 100 100 40 layers Runl Deformed Grid 100 100 Run2 LGR Child Grid Around Wellfield Run3 Click on the Translate to Finite Element model button and the following dialog will appear Alternatively you can select the Conceptual model folder in the tree and select Translate to Finite Element Model from the pop up menu 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models 25a E Translate to Finite Element Model Define FEFLOW Simulation Settings Settings mmaytesta Finite Element Mesh Output name C Users Administrator Desktop VMODFlex Projects Numerical Models FEFLOW FiniteElemer Translation Log file C Users Administrator Desktop VMO DFlex Projects Numerical Models FEFLOW FiniteElement Mes Problem Class Separate flow problem Sees Steady state Flow Type Saturated media groundwater Translation Format FEFLOW v 5 404 ASCII FEM file Start Date 10 5 2005 Start Time 12 00 00 AM Steady State Simulation Time day 1 Project Description A brief description of the project By default this is the name of the current VMOD Flex project Finite Element Mesh Select the desired finite element mesh from the combo box to use for model translation Output Name Click the Ell button and specify the output name and directory for the FEM file that is created during translation
5. Info Details Name E Statistics points Table General H Operations Type Point Data Source JE SampleFiles test_project points xls Color Description mM is a description of the data object Info The Info node contains the following information Name The name of the data object read only defined during import Type The type of the data object e g points polygon polyline Data Source The folder path of the data source when the data was imported Color The color of the data object when displayed in 2D and 3D Viewers Click the color box to select a new color for the data object Description The description of the data object as defined during import This field is editable allowing you to update the description at any time Table Button The table button allows you to view the geometry and attributes of the data object in a table view For more information on the table view please see Viewing the Data Tablelis3 section 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 133 VMOD Flex Help 6 2 Details The Details node contains information on the coordinate system of the data object and the field mappings specified during import Statistics The Statistics node displays a count summary of the various data elements that comprise the data object For example for polygon data objects the statistics node will show the number of polygons polygon parts and vertices in the data object For cros
6. 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 106 Bilinear Bilinear interpolation No prefiltering is done This mode is not suitable for shrinking an image below 50 percent of its original size Bicubic Bicubic interpolation No prefiltering is done This mode is not suitable for shrinking an image below 25 percent of its original size NearestNeighbor Nearest neighbor interpolation HighQualityBilinear Specifies high quality bilinear interpolation Prefiltering is performed to ensure high quality shrinking HighQualityBicubic High quality bicubic interpolation Prefiltering is performed to ensure high quality shrinking This mode produces the highest quality transformed images Graticule Tab The graticule tab provides display options for the preview graticule These settings are described below Padding Space 30 Back color Line style Line color i Major mark width 5 Min tick distance fep r V Auto Interval Intervals fi nan M Mark Settings Padding Space Controls the amount of buffer soace between the edge of the preview window display and the labels on the axis It may be necessary to increase this value when the X and Y coordinates contain many digits Line Style Select from various line styles e g solid dashed etc 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 107 VMOD Flex Help Line Color Set the color of the graticule lines Back color Set the backgroun
7. 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services us VMOD Flex Help HE Settings Operations General Arithmetic E Select Operation en attribute Attribute Constant x Description and Instructions Add the constant value specified from each value of the selected attribute Input Parameters Parameter Attribute tiver_stage Constant 10 T Save As New Data Object Execute To apply an attribute operation Select the desired expression from the Select Operation combo box lf you are unsure of what the expression does refer to the provided description in the Description and Instructions text box In the Input Parameters frame select an attribute from the combo box under the Value column Enter a value in the Constant field under the Value column Optional Select the Save As New Data Object check box to save the transformed data as anew data object Click the Execute button to apply the operation Creating an Attribute from 3D Gridded Data Object For Points and Surface data objects only This operation allows you to create a new attribute using 3D Gridded data for surface and points data objects This feature can be useful after you have run the numerical model simulation using VMOD Flex and you have imported the HDS file back into VMOD Flex as a 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 3D Gridded data object for visualizing the heads in 3D Viewe
8. Next Steps gt Show Only Invalid Wells Name x Y Zz Exaggeration 1 O DRUMCO grid Run Conceptual Model Select a wells data object to be used as wells in the conceptual model Boundary Conditions are createdleod You have imported a wells data objectlsel with screens and pumping schedule information A Conceptual Wells Boundary Condition object is created Create Finite Difference Grid 29 or Create Finite Element Meshl239 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow Ea 9 Before You Start Make sure you have imported a Wells Data object that contains well location screens and pumping schedule Refer to Import Wells se for more details To add a new pumping well boundary condition follow the steps below e Type in a unique name for the pumping well boundary condition in the Name field This name will appear in the Conceptual Model tree under Boundary Condition node when the boundary condition is created e Type in a description of the boundary condition in the Description field optional e Select a pumping wells data object from the Data Explorer e Click the 3 button to insert the data object into the Select Wells Data Object field The wells should then show in the 3D Preview e Click the Next blue arrow to create the data object and proceed to the next step Each pumping well must satisfy the following requirements in o
9. Output Region This button allows you to save a specified area of the image to the 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 102 georeferenced file after the image has been transformed By default the output region is the whole image Click and drag a rectangular box on the image to define a new output region and then click the Save button to save the output region to the georeference file Configure Georeferencing Options Opens the configure georeferencing options dialog box For more information on these options please see Configure Georeferencing Options section Magnification Selector Select a magnification level from the combo box Control Points Table The control points table contains the specified control points You can edit an existing control point by selecting the point from the table and then clicking the Edit button A dialog box will display prompting you to modify the control point coordinates You can also delete a control point from the control points table To do so select an existing control point from the grid and then click the Delete button Georeference Information Table The georeference information table displays information about the georeferenced image including the original image file name and path the original image size and coordinate type projected local or geographic It also displays information on the transformation such as the degree of rotation scale X Y shift
10. The FEM file is an ASCII file containing information on the problem class and model 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 255 VMOD Flex Help properties This file is required for importing your model into FEFLOW The default file name is Project_name FEM and the default directory on your computer is Project Folder Numerical Models Translation Log File When a numerical model is translated in VMOD Flex a log file is automatically generated and saved on your computer By default the log file name is Project_Name LOG and the directory is Project Name Numerical Models Click the E button to specify a new file name and directory Problem Class Currently VMOD Flex only supports the separate flow problem class Simulation Type Select Steady State or Transient from the combo box If the Steady State option is selected VMOD Flex will prepare the data set for a steady state flow simulation and will automatically use the data from the first stress period of each boundary condition and pumping well defined in your conceptual model If the Transient Flow option is selected VMOD Flex will automatically merge all the different time period data defined for each pumping well and boundary condition into the stress period format required by FEFLOW Flow Type Select the flow type of the problem class Choose from the following options Saturated media groundwater unsaturated media Unsaturated steady state linearized Rich
11. e Riverbed Bottom The elevation of the bottom of the seepage layer bedding material of the surface water body e Riverbed Thickness Thickness of the riverbed seepage layer e Leakance A numerical parameter representing the resistance to flow between the surface water body and the aquifer this field is read only and is calculated using the formula described below e Riverbed Kz Vertical hydraulic conductivity of the riverbed material e River Width Width of the river When a polyline is used to define the river geometry the default leakance formula is as follows RCHLNG x WIDTH x K x UCTOCOND COND RBTHICK When a polygon is used to define the river geometry the default leakance formula is as follows RCHLNG x WIDTH x K x UCTOCOND COND RBTHICK where COND is the Leakance RCHLNG is the reach length of the river line in each grid cell WIDTH is the River Width in each grid cell K is the Riverbed Kz UCTOCOND is the conversion factor for converting the K value to the same L and T units used by COND RBTHICK is the Riverbed Thickness DX is the length of each grid cell in the X direction 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services zs VMOD Flex Help DY is the length of each grid cell in the Y direction If the Use default Leakance option is turned off the fields used for calculating the River Leakance value Riverbed Thickness Riverbed Kz and River Width are removed from
12. Constrained conforming X Meshing Algorithm i switch Divide and conquer x V Total number of elements Approx 1000 Quality mesh q switch minimum angle 0 30 degrees 20 Refinement V Refinement along all superelement border edges Target element edge length 180 v Refinement along line addins Target element edge length 180 763 Bs V Refinement around point well addins Number of triangles around points 10 Space from points to new nodes 45 Gradation steep J smooth Polygons Refinement Mesh triangles 4095 A Mesh edges 6183 Mesh exterior boundary edges 81 Mesh interior boundary edges 357 Mesh subsegments constrained edges 438 Triangle Copyright c by J R Shewchuk v 1 6 2005 Generate 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 246 Defining Slice Elevations The third step in the finite element mesh creation involves defining slice elevations Various settings are available for defining the slice elevations in the third dialog of the finite element mesh creation wizard shown below iz e Define Finite Element Mesh l oe Define Slice Hevations Mesh Type Deformed X Number of Layers Zmin 41 527 Min Layer Thickness Zmax 0 1 365 988 Description In a deformed grid mesh the tops and bottoms of the model layers follow the horizons elevations You can refine the model layers by dividi
13. File Import O O oec Taata Un Caego wlio OOOO Een Length pooo k Surface data will usually only consist of three columns X Y and Attribute Data elevation conductivity etc VMOD Flex will automatically map the source columns to the target fields You can preview the mapped data before importing into VMOD Flex 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help 4 1 5 aol x Geographic information for the source data Coordinate Systems UTM Zone 17N NAD83 z Datum NORTH AMERICAN 1983 CONUS x mM Local Coodinate System lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel L_e Click the Next button to finish the import process Upon importing a new data object will be added to the Data Explorer Wells VMOD Flex supports the following file types for well data Excel XLS To import wells follow the steps below e Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu e Select Wells from the Data Type drop down list e Click the button and locate the source file e Enter a Name and a Description for the imported data and click Next to continue e The next step allows you to preview the source data before importing and choose a subset of the source data e g a worksheet of an excel file Select which Excel worksheet to import from the Select Worksheet drop down list Also you can choose 2012 by Schlumberger Water Servi
14. Select these surfaces geological contacts 71 data objects when defining horizons Then Create or numerical model Surfaces from these layers data objects Raster Grid of Kx or Import these as Select these data Recharge data from surface data objects objects when defining Surfer ESRI GRD properties or Recharge boundary conditions 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 182 7 3 Create New Conceptual Model At this step provide the conceptual model area and the start date BH File Tools Window Help Workflow D H OF Sot 4 D ground Define Modeling Objectives 1 layer2top Collect Data Objects Define Conceptual Model L layer2bottom Oo jal Model OO boundary D e BG wes 000000 Start date 3 28 2012 Model Area Select existing data object Projection Type Coordinate Systems Model Explorer Datum T Worid Geodetic System 1984 Conceptual Model 3D Viewer 1 al Visual MODFLOW FI VW em define cm png Quick Overview Instructions Provide a polygon for the conceptual model area Pre requisites A polygon data object has been imported or createdhal Result Conceptual Model tree is defined Next Steps Define Model Structurele4 Once you have imported sufficient raw data into your project you can begin to construct one or more conceptual models using imported or digitized data objects as buildin
15. continue to use Visual MODFLOW Classic interface for this gt PEST gt Transport MT3DMS MT3D99 RT3D PHT3D SEAWAT gt MODFLOW SURFACT MODFLOW 96 MODFLOW NWT gt MNW Package gt ETS1 Package Creating the Project e Launch VMOD Flex e Select File New Project The Create Project dialog will appear e Type in project Name Exercise e Click Browse button and navigate to a folder where you wish your projects to be saved and click OK e Define your coordinate system and datum or just leave the non cartesian as defaults e Define the Units frame For this project the default units will be fine The Create Project dialog should now look as follows 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s r Create Project L Project Information Units A Name 24 Exercise 4 Unit Settings Conductivity m s Data Repository Length m D Documents VMODFlex Pumping Rate m 3 d Recharge mm yr Daacistion Specific Storage 1 m abt Time day Project Coordinate Coordinate Systems Local Cartesian Datum r World Geodetic System 1984 e Click OK The workflow selection screen will appear e Select Numerical Modeling and the Numerical Modeling workflow will load e In this step you define the objectives of your model and the default parameters 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 55 VMOD Flex Help Zo a9 File Tools Window Help Workflo
16. sections to familiarize yourself with the program gt Then work through the Quick Start Tutorials 17 to familiarize yourself with using VMOD Flex These sections cover importing MODFLOW and Visual MODFLOW projects as well as building new models using the Conceptual Modeling approach Learning more gt See Conceptual Modeling Workflowh7A for instructions on building a grid independent 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Introduction 2 conceptual model using your raw data gt See Numerical Modeling Workflowlsa for more instructions on working with numerical inputs translating to MODFLOW packages and running and analyzing the results gt See Working with Multiple Model Scenarios bea for a better understanding of the various workflows in VMOD Flex gt See the Program Overviewl 8 section for detailed instructions on using VMOD Flex 1 1 Installation and Licensing Hardware Requirements VMOD Flex requires the following minimum system configuration e Pentium 4 1GHz recommended e 1GB RAM 4 GB or more recommended e DVD ROMdrive e 250 MB of free hard drive space e Graphics card with 3D Graphics Accelerator e Windows XP Pro SP3 32 Bit Windows Vista Business Ultimate or Enterprise 32 Bit SP1 and 64 Bit Note Windows XP Home Windows Vista Home Premium Home Basic or Starter Versions are not supported Microsoft NET Framework v 4 0 installed provided with installation Microsoft O
17. 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 208 BoundaryConditionWizardForm Polylines Zones Points Haec aj PLineO Zonel PLinel Zone13 PLine1 m Select how the attributes are defined Flines Define for the entire zone PLine4 PLine5 PLine6 PLine PLine8 xl C Define values at vertices Linear Interpolation E M Use default leakance Riverbed Thickness Riverbed River Width Conductivity Stage Bottom Leakance Static Constant lt Previous Finish Cancel Help The first combo box allows you to set an attribute as Static Steady State or Transient conditions change over time When one or more parameters are set to Transient the Transient Data button will become active When selected the Transient Data window will launch shown below The Transient Data dialog allows you to define the stress periods and values for all the attributes in the boundary condition that have been set as Transient e Click the Add Row button to add a new row to the table e Enter a Start and End time and a Value for each transient attribute Press the Enter button on your keyboard e Repeat for additional stress periods Click OK to save the transient data The second combo box provides different methods for assigning attribute values to the boundary condition The contents shown in this combo box depend on the attrib
18. 4 Import Model CA drumco Bevation 5 View Edit Grid B drumco Elevation 6 o Define Properties C VMod Imported Wells Define Boundary Conditions Select the Next Step Define Observation Zones Define Observation Wells Define Zone Budget Zones Define Particles a Select Run Type I PEST Run Single Run Translate r Run Numerical Engines o MODFLOW 2005 Model Explorer 3 Wells Boundary Condition a rid ts Properties O Aow e Click the Play button circled above to start running the engines You will see the Engine progress in the scrolling window output and also in chart format e Note that after a successful run the Heads and Pathlines items will be added the tree in the model explorer e Once finished Click the Next step button to proceed View Results e You can then choose to view results in the form of Maps Contours and Color shading or Charts 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 47 VMOD Flex Help O OF drumco Elevation 1 5 EJ Define Modeling Objectives drumco Elevation 2 B E Define Numerical Model drumco Bevation 3 B Create Grid drumco Elevation 4 EJ Import Model dumco Bevation 5 EJ View Edit Grid amp dumco Elevation 6 EJ Define Properties A VMod Imported Wells EJ Define Boundary Conditions S E Select the Next Step I Define Observation Zones I Define Observation Wells I Define Zone Budge
19. GMG solver has been demonstrated to greatly reduce model run times relative to other solvers using a comparable amount of memory Detailed information about the GMG solver including comparisons with the AMG solver can be found in the GMG Linear Equation Solver Package PDF documentation located in the Manual folder of your VMOD Flex installation media The solver parameters for the Geometric Multigrid Solver are described below using excerpts from the GMG Linear Equation Solver Package PDF documentation located in the Manual folder of your VMOD Flex installation media e Max outer iterations MXITER The maximum number of outer iterations For linear problems MXITER can be set to 1 For nonlinear problems MXITER needs to be larger but rarely more than 100 The maximum number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution is not reached beforehand e Max inner iterations ITER The maximum number of PCG iterations for each linear solution A value of 100 is typically sufficient It is frequently useful to specify a smaller 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 285 VMOD Flex Help number for nonlinear problems so as to prevent an excessive number of inner iterations This number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution for the current set of matrices in the outer iteration is not reached beforehand e Adaptive Damping Control IADAMP IADAMP is a flag that controls adaptive damping f ADAMP 0 t
20. If the maximum change in the solution is below a set convergence tolerance set here in the working units feet or metres then the solution has converged and the solver stops otherwise a new outer iteration starts e A solution accurate to 0 01 ft or m will normally be sufficient for most problems unless the maximum head difference across the modeled domain is less than one foot or metre If an appropriate mass balance is not achieved and the number of inner and outer iterations are within the maximums declared above this value can be decreased by an order of magnitude e g 0 001 Residual Criterion for Convergence Default 0 01 While the head change criterion is used to judge the overall solver convergence the residual criterion is used to judge the convergence of the inner iterations of the solver If the maximum absolute value of the residual at all nodes is less than the tolerance specified here units of length3 time then the solver will proceed to the next outer iteration If you notice that only a few inner iterations are being performed for all outer iterations and an 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 28a appropriate mass balance is not achieved the Residual Criterion value can be decreased by one or more orders of magnitude Note The residual criterion is unit dependent The default value of 0 01 is sufficient if your length units are feet or metres and your time units are secon
21. SYSTEM C gt ExportTest Search wy Organize v zz ij E vs vf NewFolder C Favorite Links Name Date modified Type Size This folder is empty B Documents More Folders E Desktop Administrator J Public jE Computer amp SYSTEM C a DATA D 3 DVD CD RW Drive E gt ih lt m Filename Conductivity SHP Click OK Depending on the type of data you may have additional settings The following options are available for Properties B Export Select Co ordinate System Word Co ordinate X Add Column Names E Null Value in Inactive Cells Select Attributes Select Layers 7 Select All E Select All 4 Layer V Layer 1 V Row F Layer 2 T Column F Layer 3 W Zones V Kx V Ky W Kz 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 323 VMOD Flex Help Choose which attributes you want to be generated and what layers should be included Click OK and the shapefile will be created The following options are available for Heads B Export Select Co ordinate System Heods at Time i Select Heads at All Time World Co ordinate x 7 500 E 666 i F 2000 E Null Value in Inactive or Dry Cells 3000 E 4000 1E 30 1E 30 6000 F 7300 Select Attributes Select V Select All E Select All V Row ml 2
22. Steady State or Transient If the Steady State Flow option is selected VMOD Flex will prepare the data set for a steady state flow simulation and will automatically use the data from the first time period only of each boundary condition and pumping well defined in VMOD Flex to run the model to achieve flow equilibrium i e a time independent solution since all inputs are constant If the Transient Flow option is selected VMOD Flex will prepare the data set for a transient flow simulation During this process VMOD Flex will automatically merge all of the different time period data defined for each pumping well and boundary condition into the stress period format required by the different versions of MODFLOW This creates a time dependent flow solution as the model is being run with different inputs at different times Specify the steady state simulation time Select to save the FLO file Translate Translate General 4 General Settings Property Package LPF MODFLOW 2005 Run Type Transient Settings Steady State Simulation Time 3650 Time Steps Save FLO file No Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads 4 Anisotropy Output Control 3 MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Property Property Package 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 280 10 10 1 3 Time Steps
23. amp drumco Bevation 6 Define Properties 1 amp 4 VMod Imported Wells Define Boundary Conditions Layer View 3D View 5 Select the Next Step Row I Define Observation Zones 0 I Define Observation Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones Column W Define Particles JE S E Select Run Type iad amp E PEST Run 7 30 Single Run EJ Translate Run Numerical Engines Toolbox MODFLOW 2005 legend ZONEBUDGET Color Heads m MODPATH S E View Resuts Sam View Charts 62 4142 J View Maps 63 8974 Model Explorer 66 8638 Inputs gt A Properties 68 3469 Fow 69 8301 Conductivity 72 7965 Storage InitialHeads Boundary Conditions Recharge Evapotranspiration Constant Heads Constant Head 1 Rivers River 0 T C River 1 Pumping Wells Pumping Wells Bc Zone Budget Particles Forward Partices Backward Particles Fow Observation Wells Outputs M Heads Dravdown Layer 1 Row 40 Column 78 X 1618 38 Y 489 18 Heads 1 00000001504747E 30 e You will then see color shading of the calculated heads in layer view e You can display heads along a row and along a column and in 3D using the same tools as you used earlier refer to View Edit Gridlse section e lf your model is transient use the time controls above the Flex Viewer to change the output time as you do this all active viewers layer row column 3D will refresh to show the heads for the new output time mel Hra
24. e Select a well from the Well Heads table Click the Add Row button from the Observation Points toolbar to add a new item to the table e Enter an observation point ID in the ID field e Enter an elevation value in the Elevation field The MODFLOW simulator supports head and concentration observation wells with multiple observation points throughout the length of the well bore Repeat the steps above to add additional points Adding Head Observation Data The Observation Data table is used to enter the observed values at specified times for the selected observation point To add observations to the Observation Data table follow the steps below e Select Observations from the Data to Display box e Select the well from the Well Heads table for which observation data will be added e Select the desired observation point from the Observation Points table e Click the Add Row button from the Observation Data toolbar to add a new item to the table e Enter the time at which the head was observed in the Time field e Enter the observed head values in the Head field 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 139 VMOD Flex Help Adding Well Tops The Well tops table is used to enter the elevation points along the well path where the well intersects with a horizon Well top information can be used in VMOD Flex to create surfaces which can then be used to define conceptual model horizons For more information on creating surface
25. the importing process consists of the following steps 1 Select the data type and source file 2 Specify the coordinate system and datum of the source data 3 Map the source data fields with required target fields and optionally create attribute fields 4 Data preview and validation The following sections provide additional information on the import process for each data type e Points 71 e Polylines so e Polygons e2 e Surfaceslsal e Wells ss e 3D Gridded Datalss e Cross Sections 97 e Maps ss e Time Schedules hoa Points Points represent discrete locations in space XYZ where attribute information is known Examples of points data include ground surface or subsurface elevations well tops locations with known aquifer hydraulic properties etc Typically this information may come from drilling wells or monitoring events where information is gathered from a specific 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data location Once imported points data can then be interpolated to generate surfaces These surfaces can be used to create conceptual model horizons or for defining property values for structural zones For more information on creating surfaces from points data see Creating Surfaces al VMOD Flex supports the following file types for points data e Shapefile SHP e AutoCAD DXF e Text TXT e Comma Separated Values CSV e Access MDB e Excel XLS For Points d
26. 1 183 49 10 mw 20 885 1395 1 176 48 1 183 51 11 mw 21 877 1487 1 176 94 1 183 55 1 mw 22 873 1529 1 175 56 1 183 57 nw 23 O07 44116554 18958 we TA AMAA AINA ARANA ATA lt Back Next gt gt Cancel L He For XLS files shown below select which Excel worksheet to import from the Select Worksheet drop down list Also you can choose which row to import from using the From row selector 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data HE Data Import 2 0 Ves m Work sheet and range Select Worksheet From row Sheeni x 1 M Preview Source Data Kx ft day a Heads 20 3 K C 574666 4863000 18 1 C 5 T 5 C 1 CE 3 13 1 C E e L E S E A 7 D M O l a L o vem e a a ae a 13 574850 4863050 19 5 10 5 1 5 13 5 14 5 e fetes e ge vm a e s e e e Cd Cid lt Back _Net gt gt Cancel Her For MDB files Shown below you can choose to import data from a table or a query by selecting either the View Tables or View Queries radio button Select the desired query table from the Select Table or Query drop down list box 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help AE Data Import Tables Select Table or Query View Tables Boreholes d p C View Queries M Preview Source Data Row ID x Y rA Layer2 Name Layer3 Layer4 gil 536212 689999 481402999999 2323 5 262
27. 1 bs E ti 13673 Cale Mi ayer 2 13673 Obs j Leger 13 14211 Cale 7 Layer 4 14211 Obs Layer 5 18364 Calc E Layer 6 18364 Obs 338 at 10885 x 10886 E 10897 G j E 10904 7 2 i E 10906 i 10914 10915 F 10917 317 2 10918 E 10922 7 10932 E 10938 10946 10947 F 10949 295 6 10950 10951 10952 10953 10957 E 10958 10975 11014 2745 12162 0 365 730 1095 1460 1825 2190 2555 2920 3285 3650 4015 Time day 3 3 Working with HydroGeoBuilder projects If you have a conceptual model project built in Hydro GeoBuilder these projects can be opened in VMOD Flex Please follow the instructions below e Ensure that you have your conceptual model created and at least one numerical grid e Right click on the numerical grid node in the tree and select Convert to Numerical Model e This will launch a new numerical model workflow window that contains the steps for navigating the inputs run and outputs for the numerical grid the conversion may take a few minutes depending on the size and complexity of the grid and your model e Use the workflow to navigate and see the resulting properties and boundary conditions For more details on the numerical modeling workflow see the Numerical Modeling Workflow section 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help A Backwards Compatibility If you open a project from Hydro GeoBuilder some of the ne
28. Boundary Conditions Constant Head 1 C Constant Head West Model Explorer EJ Select the Next Step gt D Select Grd Type St Conceptual Model 3D Viewer 1 Quick Overview Instructions Pre requisites Result Next Steps LE Define Finite Difference Grid Define Finite Element Mesh Create Finite Difference Gridkest or Create Finite Element Meshk3s The Conceptual Model has been defined 177 Anumerical grid or mesh is created Convert the conceptual model to a MODFLOW modell248 Convert Conceptual Model to FEFLOW finite element modell252 Once you have created your conceptual model you can discretize your model using either the finite difference method or the finite element method The finite difference method involves fitting your conceptual model to one or more finite difference grids Once converted the resulting numerical model can be viewed edited and then simulated in the VMOD Flex 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 229 VMOD Flex Help 8 1 environment The finite element method involves fitting your conceptual model to a finite element mesh Once translated a FEFLOW ASCII FEM file is created which can then be opened and simulated using FEFLOW Note a license of FEFLOW v 5 4 or above is required to open FEFLOW FEM files generated from VMOD Flex Sections covered in this chapter e Create Finite Difference Gridbesl e Create Finite Element Meshes Crea
29. Column I 3 OK Cancel E Choose which attributes you want to be generated and what layers should be included If your model has transient heads you have an option to include Heads from multiple times as separate attributes in the shapefile DBF file Choose specific times or Select Heads at All Times to include all heads 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Multiple Model Scenarios 32 11 Working with Multiple Model Scenarios One of the unique features of VMOD Flex is the ability to work with multiple numerical models inside a single project Unlike other modeling GUI s VMOD Flex does not restrict you to a single model scenario or single grid for your model With the workflow based approach you can generate multiple grid realizations from your conceptual model each one with one or more model runs Likewise you can import multiple MODFLOW models or Visual MODFLOW projects into a single project and analyze and compare these projects Loading a New Workflow There are a number of ways in which a new numerical model workflow window will be created e You have Imported a MODFLOW or Visual MODFLOW projects immediately after creating a new project e You have imported an additional MODFLOW or Visual MODFLOW model into an existing project To use this option select the Workflow Numerical Model menu option e You have Duplicated or Cloned an existing numerical model through the Clone option T
30. Explorer e In the Define Finite Element Mesh window select the Add in Lines Points Polygons button located below the Add ins List An Add in may be included or excluded in the mesh creation by checking or unchecking the corresponding check box respectively When an add in is checked it will also be displayed in the adjacent 2D Viewer preview window Defining the Horizontal Mesh Settings In the second dialog in the Define Finite Element Mesh wizard you can define various discretization settings for the horizontal mesh Define Finite Element Mesh oe Name Generate Finite Bement Mesh Delaunay Triangulation Method L switch Constrained conforming x Meshing Algorithm switch Divide and conquer xj V Total number of elements Approx 1000 Quality mesh q switch minimum angle 0 30 degrees 20 Refinement V Refinement along all superelement border edges Target element edge length 180 Refinement along line addins Target element edge length 180 lt V Refinement around point well addins Number of triangles around points 10 Space from points to new nodes 45 Gradation steep smooth Polygons Refinement Triangle Copyright c by J R Shewchuk v 1 6 2005 Generate Finite element meshes are created using the Triangle mesh generator developed by J R Shewchuk Triangle provides various options for generating finite element meshes These opt
31. Intervals Specify an interval spacing and the number of classes will be determined from the range of the attribute data For example if your data rage is 100 and you specify a 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 153 VMOD Flex Help 10 interval spacing 10 classes will be created As the number of intervals classes is modified rows are automatically removed or added to the color table For the Elevation color scheme the maximum value will always be Red and the minimum value will always be Blue but the gradient between will change automatically depending on the specified number of classes e VMOD Flex automatically calculates the intervals based on the defined specified number of classes or equal intervals e Once the settings have been defined click the Apply button to show the changes in an active 2D or 3D Viewer Area General Operations Style M Show Area Fill Labels Colors m Fill Settings Lines Vertices Pattern WME AM EE MZ Diagonal Transparency D Preview Select the Show Area Fill check box to show hide the area file If unchecked only the shape boundary will be visible in 2D and 3D Viewers 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings Select the color method and fill pattern symbology from the appropriate combo boxes Choose from the following color methods e Specified Shape is co
32. New Data Object New Folder 2D Viewer 3D Viewer e The Create Surface dialog will display Specify the general settings described in the following section 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 114 HE Create Surface x General Settings Interpolation Settings Surface Name Surface Description OK Cancel Help Enter a unique name for the surface in the Surface Name field and a description of the surface optional in the Description text box The Data Source frame allows you to select the point data object s from which the surface will be created Adding a Data Source e From the Data Explorer select the desired Point data object from which the surface will be interpolated e Click the Add button to add the point data object to the Data Source frame e VMOD Flex allows you to create a single surface from multiple point data objects Repeat the steps above to add additional points data objects to the Data Source frame e For each data source select the Z Value from the combo box shown below The Z 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 115 VMOD Flex Help value can be any numeric attribute stored in the points data source e g Elevation Conductivity etc General Settings Interpolation Settings Surface Name Sutaced Description D points Elevation X Y Elevation Next click the Interpolation Settings tab to define the in
33. Pre requisites Finite Element Meshks9l has been created Result AFEFLOW FEM file ASCIl is generated Next Steps Open this project file in FEFLOW v 5 4 or later Once you have the conceptual model designed and at least one finite element mesh you are ready to populate this mesh with the conceptual data Proceed to the Translate to Finite Element Model step in the Conceptual Model workflow this is shown in the display below Visual MODFLOW Flex feone mode EX File Tools Window Help Workflow uaa lt m 32 Conceptual Model amp Data Ca 0 OF Dg a2 DE gound Define Modeling Objectives DO boundary Collect Data Objects OG const head Define Conceptual Model OO lakes Define Model Structure ine Property Zones W Select the Next Step S E Select Grid Type EJ View Finite Element Mesh View Finite Diference Grid E Translate to FEFLOW Model Convert to MODFLOW Model OO general head Translate to Finite Element Model Model Explorer E Conceptual Model 1 C Model Boundary Structure L Horizons C Horizont I Horizon2 i C Horizon3 5 E Zones E Zone1 L E Zone2 c C Properties S E Simulation Domain 5 E Model Domain CH Boundary Conditions c C NumericalGrid1 L Deformed Grid 100100 s 5 C LGR Child Grid Around Welfield S A Run3 c E Inputs i E Outputs L Uniform Grid 100 100 40 layers S Runt E E Inputs E Outputs O AiniteElementMesh1
34. Services Working with Your Data 100 TIF Tagged Image Format JPG JPEG Interchange Format Note When a raster image is imported into VMOD Flex the source file is copied and saved in the project s data repository folder As such the original file may be modified moved or deleted without affecting the imported raster image To import a map into VMOD Flex follow the steps below Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu Select Map from the Data Type drop down list Click the button and locate the source file Enter a Name and a Description for the data and click Next to continue Next select the Coordinate System of the image file If the coordinate system is different than the one defined in the project settings VMOD Flex will perform a geotransformation converting all coordinates to the project s coordinate system Click the Next button to continue to the next step All raster images must be georeferenced before importing into VMOD Flex If the selected raster image has already been georeferenced it should have an associated georeferencing tag file and does not need to be georeferenced in VMOD Flex Please note that the georeferencing tag file must be located in the same folder as the selected source file in order for VMOD Flex to recognize it The following table summarizes the supported graphics file types and the corresponding georeferencing tag files Raster Sour
35. Specified Head Attributes Edit Layer Row Column HCoord VCoord Atrribute e From the toolbox select the Desired Boundary condition group Constant Head Rivers etc e Then select Edit Single or Edit Group e Click on a cell that belongs to this group a dialog will appear where you can see the parameters for a single cell or group of cells e Click Next Step to proceed You will arrive at the Flow Boundaries step Proceed to Run or Define Optional Model Elements e You will arrive at a choice screen here you can proceed to some of the non essential inputs for the model such as Zone Budget Zones Particle Tracking or Observation Wells Or you can proceed to Running the simulation 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 60 E Define Modeling Otyectives Choose the Next Step gt PW 0216 2 AS hep PW 2006 4 attt gt A A gt reget 0929 Particles o 30 21 5 6o so ana 120 224 Observation Wells e Click the Select Run Type button to proceed Mouse over this and you will see the blue Next arrow appear on top just left click once to select this option Alternatively the Next step button will take you to this step as it is pre define as the default step oe i N Si Con oor Select Run Type Compose
36. Tot Por is the percentage of the rock or soil that is void of material and is used by MT3D to determine the chemical reaction coefficients and for calculating the average linear groundwater flow velocity in the particle tracking solution schemes A different porosity is used for MT3D than for MODPATH because MT3D accounts for additional transport and reactive processes such as dispersion The total porosity term is not used for 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 10 5 Numerical Modeling Workflow 270 MODFLOW simulations These Storage parameters may be defined on a cell by cell basis using constant property values and or distributed property values When importing or assigning the Storage property zones Visual MODFLOW will require valid data for each of the above parameters Initial Heads In order to start solving the flow simulation MODFLOW requires an initial guess for the head values in the model A good initial guess for the starting heads of the simulation can reduce the required run time significantly The Initial Head values are also used to calculate the drawdown values as measured by the difference between the starting head and the calculated head Define Boundary Conditions At the Define Boundary Conditions step you can view the various boundary condition cells and edit the numerical attributes 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 271 VMOD Flex Help O El Convert conceptual model to n
37. Use Previous MODFLOW Run requires you to select a HDS file from a previous MODFLOW Run 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 302 A Caution Heads from Previous MODFLOW Run Warning The selected HDS file cannot be the same as the HDS file in the current translation directory If you select Use HDS from Previous MODFLOW Run you must choose a HDS file from another directory Or make a copy of the HDS file from the current translation directory rename this eg Model_InitialHeads HDS and choose this file 10 10 1 10Anisotropy Horizontal anisotropy is the ratio of transmissivity or hydraulic conductivity along a column to its component value along each row The Anisotropy settings in Visual MODFLOW may be accessed in the Run section by selecting MODFLOW Anisotropy from the top menu bar The Anisotropy Factor window as shown in the figure below will provide two choices for determining how the anisotropy is calculated for the model Translate Translate General 4 General Settings Anisotropy Factor Anisotropy by Layer 5 MODFLOW 2005 Settings Time Steps Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Settings Anisotropy By Layer Output Control MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Anisotropy Factor Anisotropy Factor 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services sos VMOD Flex Help e Anisotropy by layer e Anisotropy as spe
38. View Edit Properties e Atthis step you can view edit the flow properties for the model 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials se kd MODFLOW Flex sampl O grid Ru fia aJ File Tools Window Help Workflow 8x D a O O El amp Data drumco Elevation 1 S E Define Modeling Objectives I i Inspect Define Properties drumco Bevation 2 View Edit Grid B drumco Bevation 3 J Define Properties yems F raa arete gosana v wee drumco Bevation 5 e Lye R A A B Baggeration 10 dumco Bevation 6 eT 1 J VMod imported Wells e Ee amp Vie Row 1 amp 7 Column 1 310 Model Explorer 3D DRUMCO Model Boundary B Structure fom H Horizons Conductivity hd Zones es CE Properties Zones z Simulation Domain od By Mod aa Database Layer View 5 Boundary Conditions Pumping Wells Boundary Condition DRUMCO grid B Run Legend he n Color Zones 2 0 Pow N M Conductivity 2 Storage C IntialHeads Boundary Conditions Recharge Evapotranspiration Constant Heads C Constant Head 1 Rivers River 0 River 1 Pumping Wells Pumping Wells Boundary Cond Zone Budget C Particles Forward Par
39. a quick walk through of the basics of building a conceptual model and converting this to a numerical model Objectives e Learn how to create a project and import your raw data e Become familiar with navigating the GUI and steps for conceptual modeling e Learn how to define a 3D geological model and flow properties e Define boundary conditions using your GIS data e Define a MODFLOW grid then populate this grid with data from the conceptual model e View the resulting properties and boundary conditions e Translate the model inputs into MODFLOW packages and run the MODFLOW engines e Understand the results by interpreting heads and drawdown in several views e Check the quality of the model by comparing observed heads to calculated heads Required Files e Several files are required for this exercise which should be included with the VMOD Flex installation These files are available in your My Documents folder VMODFlex Tutorials ConceptualModel If you cannot find these files please download them from our website http trials swstechnology com software VMODFlex 2012 Tutorials conceptual model supp files zip Creating the Project e Launch VMOD Flex e Select File New Project The Create Project dialog will appear e Type in project Name Exercise 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help e Click Browse button and navigate to a folder where you wish your projects to be saved and click OK e Define y
40. and the output file name path and image size Georeference Information Property Value Image File O VM5 6 T estin Image Size Width 1453 Height 1133 Coord Type Projected Transformation Rotation 0 07 Scale 1 006 x Shift 574 140 98 Y Shift 4 862 789 96 Output File Q VM5 6 Testin Output Region Left 574 196 01 Top 4 863 897 78 Width 127 27 Height 74 07 Output Size Width 127 Height 75 r 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 103 VMOD Flex Help Adding Georeference Points In order to map pixels of the image to a coordinate system the image must have at least two georeference points with known world coordinates To set a georeference point e From the top toolbar click on the Add button e Click on a map location where the world coordinates are known e Ageoreference point window will appear prompting for the X and Y world coordinates of the selected location e Enter the X and Y coordinates for this point e Repeat this procedure for additional georeference points e When you set a georeference point it is added to the Control Points Table You can improve the accuracy of the georeferencing by adding more than two control points to the image When the image is transformed the Preview tab will display the original control points and the corresponding georeferenced points thus allowing you to visualize the accuracy of the georeferencing Once you have set at least two georeference points click t
41. are designated as no flow cells the MODFLOW program allows the recharge to be applied to the grid cells in the upper most active wet layer in the model The Recharge settings are shown in the following Recharge options window and these are described below e Recharge is only applied to the top grid layer If any grid cells in Layer 1 are dry or if they are designated as no flow cells the recharge values assigned to these grid cells will NOT be carried down to the underlying active wet grid cells In this case the inactive or dry cells act like an impermeable barrier to the recharge 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 2 e Recharge is applied to the specified layer It allows the user to assign the recharge values to any of the specified model layer e Recharge is applied to the uppermost active layer If any grid cells in Layer 1 are dry or if they are designated as no flow cells the recharge values assigned to these grid cells will be carried down to the upper most active wet grid cell in the same vertical column of grid cells Note A constant head boundary condition always intercepts recharge and prevents deeper infiltration Evapotranspiration The Evapotranspiration distribution can be applied to any of the user specified model Layers lf assigned to the top grid layer and some cells in the top layer become dry during the course of the simulation or if some cells in the top layer are de
42. available in this combo box depend on which boundary condition type is selected The table below summarizes the available options for each boundary condition type 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 2 Define Boundary Condition x Select Boundary Condition Type Show gt gt Specified Head v Help Choose the desired boundary Name condition type from the list and define Specified Head 1 a name and optionally a description on Define where the boundary condition Description object should be connected on the simulation model domain this will determine to what model layer the boundary condition will be translated Top Bottom Intermediate You must then select a polygon or polyline to Where to connect on the Simulation Model Domain define the boundary condition geometry Top Select the Sides option if you wish to define a boundary condition to the side face of the simulation model domain For this option supported Select a polyline or polygon from Data Explorer Gran ceninon hese ae Specified Head General Head and Specified Flux Geometry lt Previous Next gt Help T Ee iate v ConstantHead v v v v iver V General Head v v v v se SIII Recharge ov ia i i on C ___ Sete Boundary conditions can be applied to the top bottom intermediate layers or sides of the simulation model doma
43. be added to the vertex set to enforce the delaunay property Meshing Algorithm I switch Two Delaunay algorithms are provided for generating the finite element mesh Divide and Conquer and Incremental Typically the divide and conquer algorithm is preferred However if this algorithm fails use the incremental algorithm Total Number of Elements Approx For the Conforming and Constrained Conforming triangulation methods you can specify the desired number of elements that comprise the finite element mesh Please note that the specified number of elements cannot be less than the default number generated by Triangle i e the number generated if this option is disabled Minimum Angle For the Constrained Conforming triangulation method a minimum angle can be specified The specified angle will replace the default bound on the minimum angle 20 degrees The specified angle may include a decimal point but cannot be expressed in exponential notation Refinement Options e Edges of triangles along model boundary should have approx length Use this option to set the approximate length of edges Segments that comprise the model boundary domain Vertices will be added along the boundary creating subsegments with the specified length This option will refine the areas along the model domain boundary e Edges of triangles along line should have approx length Use this option to set the approximate length of edges of triangles along line add
44. bedding material of the surface water body e Leakance A numerical parameter representing the resistance to flow between the boundary head and the model domain this field is read only and is calculated using 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 226 formula described below e Lakebed Thickness Thickness of the lakebed Seepage layer e Lakebed Conductivity Vertical hydraulic conductivity of the lakebed material e Precipitation Rate per Unit Area The rate of precipitation per unit area at the surface of the lake L T e Evaporation Rate per Unit Area The rate of evaporation per unit area from the surface of the lake L T e Overland Runoff Overland runoff L3 T from an adjacent watershed entering the lake e Artificial Withdrawal The volumetric rate or flux L3 T of water removal from a lake by means other than rainfall evaporation surface outflow or ground water seepage Normally this would be used to specify the rate of artificial withdrawal from a lake for human water use or if negative artificial augmentation of a lake volume for esthetic or recreational purposes The default leakance formula is as follows _ DX x DY x K x UCTOCOND RBTHICK where e COND is the Leakance e K is the Lakebed Kz e UCTOCOND is the conversion factor for converting the K value to the same L and T units used by COND e RBTHICK is the Lakebed Thickness e DX is the len
45. can be viewed edited in the Data Tablelis l section Once you have the head observation data defined navigate to the Define Observations step in the numerical model workflow ee Buea linapect Dafine Observation Wells Define Properties Views Ek PEPR e 2 SE stateis o Bee Define Observation Zones 1 H J Define Observation Wells Define Zone Budget Zones Row I Define Particles 1 5 Select Run Type ar Translate Column DE una Te i W View Chats 3D View Maps Toolbox Select Observation Object Update Method Add Replace Merge CUCM HRT TTT AUUAIAUVANAUANAN Layer Row Column HCoord VCoord Atrribute Below the toolbox you will see the insert blue arrow select your Observation Wells data object from the data explorer and click on the 3 button The observation wells should then appear in the 2D view and will also appear as a new node on the numerical model tree 10 7 Define Zone Budget Zones At the Define Zone Budget Zones step you can view the zone budget zones that been imported from a Visual MODFLOW model In future releases you will be able to define new zone budget zones 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 10 8 10 9 Numerical Modeling Workflow 276 The Flex Viewer allows you to view these in 2D plan cross section and 3D Views Define Particles At the Define Particles step you can view forward and reverse particles that have been imported from a Visual MODFLOW model In future rel
46. color style width And the number of contour lines or the contour interval and the starting value minimum by which contour intervals will be calculated Settings in the Labels tab allow you to adjust the font size and color and the decimal format In the Settings tree under Isolines Colors you can access the color page where you can 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings choose which attribute you want to render in the case of Properties or Recharge and Evapotranspiration you can render by Zone or by the specified Attribute eg Kx Recharge rate etc For more information on the color by attribute feature please refer to Color By Attributel1so section Isosurfaces The lsoSurface node allow you to create and modify one or more isosurfaces from 3D gridded attribute data An isosurface is a 3D planar surface defined by a constant parameter value in 3D space lsosurfaces are typically used for demonstrating the spatial distribution of a selected parameter For groundwater modeling purposes isosurfaces are generally used for representing the spatial distribution of heads drawdowns and concentrations 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 175 VMOD Flex Help Creating an lsosurface To create an isosurface follow the steps below e From the Attribute Name combo box select the attribute from which the isosurface is to be created e Specify the attribute value in the Attribute V
47. criterion for convergence of 0 001 should be appropriate for most problems However if you notice that only a few inner iterations are being performed for every outer iteration and an appropriate mass balance is not achieved this parameter value can be decreased by one or more orders of magnitude e Damping Factor for the Outer Iterations Default 1 This factor allows the user to reduce dampen the head change calculated during each successive outer iteration For most well posed and physically realistic groundwater flow problems the dampening factor of one will be appropriate This parameter can be used to make a non convergent oscillating or divergent solution process more stable such that a solution will be achieved This is done by decreasing the damping factor to a value between 0 and 1 only rarely lt 0 6 This parameter is similar to acceleration parameters used in other solvers e Relative Residual Criterion Default 0 This parameter provides another method of checking for convergence of the inner iteration This method compares the residual from the most recent inner iteration to the residual from the initial inner iteration Once the most recent inner iteration residual is below the initial inner iteration residual times the relative residual criterion the current outer iteration is completed and a new outer iteration will be started 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 10 10 1 4 4 SIP Numerical Modeling Work
48. display in the 3D Viewer window For 3D gridded data objects generated by steady state flow models only one time step will be available For 3D gridded data objects generated by transient flow models multiple time steps will be available as defined in the Translation settings in VMOD Flex i e Translation Time Steps 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 177 VMOD Flex Help Conceptual Modeling Workflow A Conceptual Model refers to a basic high level representation of the hydrogeological system being modeled It will form the foundation for one or more numerical models In VMOD Flex the conceptual model is completely grid and simulator independent This means you define the inputs using your raw data objects surfaces polylines polygons etc The grid or mesh is only introduced at the time of launching a numerical model This allows you to e Convert the conceptual model to multiple numerical models for uncertainty analysis e Convert the conceptual model to a MODFLOW or FEFLOW model e Easily update corresponding numerical models as your conceptualization changes The sequential step in building the conceptual model are presented in the workflow navigator and are summarized below 1 Define Modeling Objectiveshal O Es A 2 Collect Data Objectsh73 E Define Modeling Objectives through importing or creating i q o 3 Define the Conceptual Model Arealts2 oon 4 Define Model Structurelte4 vertical layer
49. drumco Elevation 4 EJ Import Model dumco Bevation 5 EJ View Edit Grid amp dumco Elevation 6 EJ Define Properties A VMod Imported Wells EJ Define Boundary Conditions S E Select the Next Step I Define Observation Zones I Define Observation Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones Define Particles S E Select Run Type f PEST Run EJ Single Run E Translate Run Numerical Engines EJ MODFLOW 2005 Ej ZONEBUDGET MODPATH sult View Charts I View Maps View Results a gt DRUMCO grid Run e Click the View Maps button 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help 2 demo eer aJ File Tools Window Help Workflow 8x D G a O O E amp Data amp crumco Elevation 1 5 EJ Define Modeling Objectives B drumco Elevation 2 Define Numerical Model ce drumco Elevation 3 B Create Grid 1 drumco Elevation 4 Import Model Nowe dramco Elevation 5 EJ View Edit Grid V Layer PP Q Eaggeration 10 Virtual grid Virtual grid size 50 Wireframe
50. e Screen Top Z elevation of top of screen For each well in the source data the Screen ID must be unique Also screens should not overlap within a single well These requirements will be validated in the final step of the well import process If you selected the pumping schedule check box in the previous step click the Pumping Schedule tab and then map the appropriate columns from the source field to the following target fields e Pumping Start Date in MWDD YYYY HH MM SS format time is optional e Pumping End Date in MWDD YYYY HH MM SS format time is optional e Pumping Rate Note Please consider the following when importing a pumping schedule In your source data the final time in the pumping schedule should have a pumping rate of 0 to indicate the stop time If time is not included in the source data just the date VMOD Flex will automatically set the time to 12 00 00 pm Currently Pumping Schedules can only be imported using absolute time Please ensure that the date and time values in your source data are expressed in absolute time MM DD YYYY HH MM SS and not relative time 0 10 days 10 20 days etc Well Heads with Observation Points 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data s RE Data Import O x m Data Mapping Wellheads Observation Points Target_fields p f Logger Id Elevation peee Unit category e Multiplier no e e Data type Quemi
51. features such as river and road networks VMOD Flex supports the following file types for polyline data e Shapefile SHP e AutoCAD DXF To import polyline data follow the steps below e Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu e Select Polyline from the Data Type drop down list e Click the button and locate the source file e Enter a Name and a Description and then click Next to continue The next step involves selecting the coordinate system of the source file and will vary depending on which file type is selected for the source file For SHP files if the associated PRu file is located in the same location as the source file VMOD Flex can automatically detect the coordinate system of the source data and will perform a geotransformation if the coordinate system is different than that defined in the project settings If a PRu file is missing than you will be prompted to select the Coordinate System for the data being imported For DXF files you will always be prompted to select the Coordinate System of the selected source file Click the Next button to continue If the file type is SHP the next step involves creating attributes If you are importing from DXF file you can skip this step 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help RE Data Import p loj x Data Mapping Target_ fields Map_to Unit
52. for defining attributes can be defined on the parameter level allowing you to use different methods for different parameters The supported methods include e Use Constant Value e Use Surface Data Object e Use 3D Gridded Data Object e Use Shapefile The following sections provide information on the following topics e Defining a New Property Zone e Assigning Property Parameters e Editing Property Zones e Deleting a Property Zone 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 195 VMOD Flex Help Creating New Property Zone i Before You Start Make sure you have imported or created all the data objects that you plan on using for properties If you wish to use a property distribution Import Surfaces ss or Create Surfacesh lf you wish to use shapefiles Import Polygons 82 or Digitize Polygons 118 Before you can create a property zone you must have already defined horizons for the conceptual model For more information see Defining the Structurelisal To define a new property zone follow the steps below e Enter a Name and Description optional for the property zone in the Name and Description fields respectively e Select the method by which the property zone geometry will be defined There are two options Use Structural Zone s and Use Polygon Data Object Using Structural Zone s This method allows you to create a property zone from existing structural zones in your conceptual model i e Zones generate
53. force an unnecessarily accurate linear solution This may be alleviated with the IITER parameter or with damping e Relaxation parameter RELAX The RELAX parameter can be used to improve the spectral condition number of the ILU preconditioned system The value of RELAX should be approximately one However the relaxation parameter can cause the factorization to break down If this happens then the GMG solver will report an assembly error and a value smaller than one for RELAX should be tried This item is read only if ISC 4 e Upper bound of estimate NPBOL IOUTGMG is a flag that controls the output of the GMG solver The possible values of IOUTGMG and their meanings are as follows If IOUTGMG 0 then only the solver inputs are printed If IOUTGMG 1 then for each linear solve the number of PCG iterations the value of the damping parameter the 12 norm of the residual and the max norm of the head change and its location column row layer are printed At the end of a time stress period the total number of GMG calls PCG iterations and a running total of PCG iterations for all time stress periods are printed If IOUTGMG 2 then the convergence history of the PCG iteration is printed showing the I2 norm of the residual and the convergence factor for each iteration IOUTGMG 3 is the same as IOUTGNG 1 except output is sent to the terminal instead of the MF2K LIST output file IOUTGMG 4 is the same as IOUTGMG 2 except output i
54. general each boundary conditions has the same set of graphical tools on the left hand toolbar for editing the model boundary conditions The following is a description of how to use these options For specific descriptions of the data requirements and data entry options refer to the sections describing each boundary condition type Edit gt e Edit gt Single is used to edit one or more grid cells belonging to the same group of boundary condition cells e Edit gt Group is used to edit all of the grid cells belonging to the selected group of boundary condition cells To delete a specific boundary condition cell group right click on this node in the tree and select Delete If you need to adjust the cell assignments for specific boundary conditions you have a few options e lf your numerical model originated from a conceptual model then create a new conceptual boundary condition using the modified polygon polyline geometry then re run the Conceptual to Numerical Conversion e f your numerical model originated from a MODFLOW VMOD Import then make the cell 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 273 10 5 1 VMOD Flex Help adjustments using VMOD Classic interface and import the adjusted model By default VMOD Flex uses the following color scheme for Boundary Condition Cells Constant Head Red River Blue General Head Green Drain Grey Lake Light blue Recharge Varies zone based Evapotranspiration Varies z
55. is ideal if you have a Surfer GRD or ESRI ASCII GRD file containing parameter values Follow the steps below e Select Surface as the method from the combo box You should then see the 3 button become activated under the Value column e From the Data Explorer select the desired surface data object e Click the 3 button to insert this data object into the Object field Note The selected surface data object must cover the entire area of the property zone or else the data object cannot be used Use 3D Gridded Data 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 199 VMOD Flex Help The Use 3D Gridded Data method allows you to use an existing 3D gridded data object to define spatially variable attribute values Follow the steps below e Select 3D Grid as the method from the combo box You should then see the 3 button become activated e From the Data Explorer select the 3D Gridded data object e Click the button to insert it into the parameter field e Select the desired attribute value from the Mapping combo box Note The specified 3D Gridded data object must horizontally and vertically overlap the defined property zone geometry or else the data object cannot be used Use Shapefile Attribute The Use Shapefile method is only available when you define the property zone geometry using a polygon data object This method allows you to assign an attribute value using an attribute from the specified polygon data object Follo
56. left mouse button This button only shows when creating edit a Points data object Add Polyline Digitize a polyline in the 2D Viewer Click the left mouse to start the line and then left click to insert a vertex along the line path Double click to end the polyline This button only shows when creating editing a Polyline data object Zz Add Polygon Digitize a polygon in the 2D Viewer Click the left mouse button to start the polygon Each successive left mouse Click will insert a vertex Double click to close the polygon Move Points Move a point by selecting and dragging the points to a new location in the 2D Viewer Rescale Select a shape element and stretch or shrink the geometry by selecting and dragging a side or corner of the blue box Rotate Select a shape element and rotate the geometry clockwise or anti clockwise by selecting and holding the blue box while moving the mouse a z G Delete Shape Delete the selected shape Undo All Undo all edits This button will revert the data object back to its original geometry If you are editing an existing polyline or polygon data object the Selector combo box located at the bottom of the 2D Viewer allows you to select and modify the points vertices that comprise the features in the data object For example if you are editing a polyline data object you can select Points from the Selector combo box and each vertex that comprises each polyline will become activ
57. models where there are no cells below However this method can cause some problems in multi layer models where inactive cells occur beneath wet cells Wetting Head When a dry cell is wetted the new head may be calculated using one of two methods Calculated from neighbors Head Zoot Wetting factor Neighboring head Zbot Calculated from threshold Head Zoot Wetting factor Wetting threshold Where Zbot is the elevation of the bottom of the current cell Generally the first equation is thought to be more reasonable since the cell s new head is varied according to the head in the neighboring cell which caused it to become wet However in situations where MODFLOW is over estimating head changes during iterations 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow soo this equation may cause non convergence The second equation can then be used to attempt a more stable solution Setting Head Values in Dry Cells Each dry cell is assigned a default head value as a flag to indicate it is dry This value is typically a very large negative number e g 1 0e30 However the presence of large negative head values in dry cells may cause problems for parameter estimation simulations because this large negative value may be used to calculate the calibration residual calculated head observed head at a grid cell that has become dry during one of the PEST iterations In this case it is more appropria
58. of the chart window you can choose what observation data to view select individual wells or see wells that belong to a specific group After making a change to the well s selection click on the Apply button to update the chart Time Series e In the Charts toolbox under Chart Type select Time Series and the following window will appear 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 3 View Charts Chart Type Time Series Time Series X 10932 Calc 10932 Obs 12957 Calc 12957 Obs 12964 Calc 12964 Obs 13082 Calc A 13082 Obs 13662 Calc 13662 Obs 13673 Calc 13673 Obs 14211 Calc 14211 Obs 382 E Show All Observation 360 4 F Layer 1 ae F Layer 3 T Layer 4 F Layer 5 E Layer 6 3388 10885 A 10886 10897 E 10904 E 10906 10914 10915 E 10917 10918 18364 Calc 18364 Obs Heads m 4 m E 10922 J 10932 10938 E 10946 4 E 10947 E 10949 295 6 10950 10951 10952 J 11014 2745 12162 X 0 365 730 1095 1460 1825 2190 2555 2920 3285 3650 4015 Time day Mass Balance e Click on the Mass Balance button to launch Mass Balance charts e The features of the Mass Balance graphs are described in the VMOD Classic Interface documentation Please see section 9 3 3 Mass Balance Grap
59. proceed to the Properties step e Now as explained previously you can review the properties and boundary conditions and translate and run this model e Once the heads are generated you can compare this to the results from previous grids 3 2 Importing VMOD MODFLOW Models The following example is a quick walk through of the basics of importing an existing Visual MODFLOW or MODFLOW data set Objectives e Learn how to create a project and import an existing numerical model e Become familiar with navigating the GUI and steps for numerical modeling e Learn how to view and edit properties and boundary conditions in a variety of views e Translate the model inputs into MODFLOW packages and run the MODFLOW engines e Understand the results by interpreting heads and drawdown in several views e Check the quality of the model by comparing observed heads to calculated heads Required Files e This tutorial is designed to allow you to select your own Visual MODFLOW or MODFLOW project and follow through the steps If you wish to use the model that is shown in the following example it can be downloaded from our website below http trials swstechnology com software VMODFlex 2012 Tutorials vmod model import zip 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 53 VMOD Flex Help A Before You Start VMOD Flex currently supports flow simulations only If you need to modify or maintain a model that utilizes any of the following features you must
60. proportional to the size of the grid cell Linear Interpolation Explained When the Define values at vertices option is selected two sets of boundary condition data are required one set for the grid cell at the Start Point of the line or line segment and one set for the grid cell at the End Point of the line or line segment The boundary condition data for the grid cells between the Start Point grid cell and the End Point grid cell will be linearly interpolated between these two points using the formula below TVAR i where e Xi is the boundary condition parameter value at the ith grid cell along the line e XSP is the boundary condition parameter value at the Start Point of the line e XEP is the boundary condition parameter value at the End Point of the line e TVAR1 i is the cumulative length of the line at the ith grid cell along the line as measured from the center of the Start Point grid cell through the center of each successive grid cell along the line see following figure e LENGTH is the total length of the line as measured from the center of the Start Point grid cell through to the center of the End Point grid cell see following figure When the line is digitized from the Start Point to the End Point each grid cell is numbered in sequence according to the order in which the line passes through each cell If the line passes through the same grid cell twice the grid cell will be numbered twice as seen for grid c
61. pumping or injecting wells rivers drains and focused recharge e regions of site scale contamination within a regional aquifer where simulations of plume movement are of interest e regions requiring detailed representation of heterogeneity as may be required to simulate faults lithologic displacements caused by faulting fractures thin lenses pinch outs of geologic units and so on VMOD Flex allows you to create up to nine child grids within a single parent grid However you cannot create a child grid within a child grid and child grids cannot not overlap within a single parent grid A Adding Child Grids Child Grids can only be added in the conceptual modeling workflow VMOD Flex currently does not support adding Child Grids onto models that have been imported If you wish to run LGR on an existing project you can re build this using the Conceptual Modeling workflow For more information on the local grid refinement package please refer to MODFLOW 2005 The U S Geological Survey Modular Ground Water Model Documentation of Shared Node Local Grid Refinement LGR and the Boundary Flow and Head BFH Package by Steffen W Mehl and Mary C Hill U S Geological Survey There are two ways in which you can define a child grid within a numerical model grid e When defining the parent grid check the Create Child Grid box in the Vertical Grid dialog 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 238 a
62. screen directions carefully You will be prompted to enter your name company name and serial number Please ensure that you enter your serial number exactly as it appears on your CD case or invoice Be sure to use capital letters and hyphens in the correct locations Once the installation is complete you should see the VMOD Flex icon on your Desktop labeled VMOD Flex To start working with VMOD Flex double click on this icon Uninstalling To uninstall VMOD Flex follow the steps below Make sure that VMOD Flex program is closed For Windows XP users go to Start Settings Control Panel For Windows Vista users go to Start Control Panel Click Add or Remove Programs for Windows XP or Programs for Vista Select VMOD Flex from the list of installed programs Click Uninstall Licensing VMOD Flex supports both dongle based hardware licensing and software based licensing For more information on software licensing please consult the VMOD Flex Getting Started Guide available on the installation DVD in PDF format For general license inquires please contact Schlumberger Water Services Sales sws sales slb com Starting VMOD Flex Once VMOD Flex has been installed on your computer simply double click on the VUOD Flex shortcut icon located on your computer s desktop Alternatively you can access the software via the start menu by clicking on Start Programs 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Introduction 4 SWS
63. the numerical model and translate this into the various input files needed by MODFLOW and the other engines The files will be created in the directory defined in the previous step Visual MODFLOW Flex demo_ DRUMCO grid a File Tools Window Help Workflow 82x PESAN oom DB Data 1 dumco Bevation 1 EJ Define Modeling Objectives L 1 dumco Elevation 2 S E Define Numerical Mode Translate 1 drumco Elevation 3 I Create Grid 1 crumco Bevation 4 Import Model 0 dumco Bevation 5 EJ View Edt Grid Talon A 1 dumco Bevation 6 EJ Define Properties I Mh ed Well D dary Condi 1249 28 PM Intialize a TAAL Wed imported Wels i aa 12 49 28 PM Finalize p E Sea a 12 48 28 PM Initialize I Define Observation Zones 12 49 28 PM Finalize I Define Observation Wells 1249 28 PM Intialize Define Zone Budget Zon 12 49 28 PM Finalize oor penaas ot Zones 1249 28 PM ze 12 49 28 PM Finalize B E Select Run Type 12 49 28 PM Initialize I PEST Run 12 49 28 PM c Schlumberger Water Services EJ Single Run 12 49 28 PM Translate Stat 12 49 28 PM Section Co ordinate system ES eco 1249 28 PM Finalize a 12 49 28 PM NDC Package ao 12 49 28 PM No Dry Cell Package translator Initialize 12 49 28 PM No Dry Cell Package translator Finalize 12 49 28 PM NAM Package 12 49 28 PM Name Fie translator Initialize 12 49 28 PM Name Fie translator Finalize 12 49 28 PM setetteseteetetetetets MODP
64. the table and the Leakance field becomes a writable field where a value may be entered Supported Geometry The geometry for River boundary conditions can be specified using polylines or polygons General Head For finite difference models VMOD Flex supports translation of the General Head Boundary Package included with MODFLOW The MODFLOW input data for General Head grid cells is stored in the projectname GHB file Currently for finite element models translation of this boundary condition is not supported The function of the General Head Boundary GHB Package is mathematically similar to that of the River Drain and Evapotranspiration Packages Flow into or out of a cell from an external source is provided in proportion to the difference between the head in the cell and the reference head assigned to the external source The application of this boundary condition is intended to be general as indicated by its name but the typical application of this boundary condition is to represent heads in a model that are influenced by a large surface water body outside the model domain with a known water elevation The purpose of using this boundary condition is to avoid unnecessarily extending the model domain outward to meet the element influencing the head in the model As a result the General Head boundary condition is usually assigned along the outside edges sides of the simulation model domain This scenario is illustrated in the following figu
65. the View Results step you have the option to View Mapsl or View Charts s14 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help Maps contains contours and color shading of heads and drawdown and also contains MODPATH results if MODPATH was included with the model run Charts contains several chart types e Observed vs Calculated Heads e Time Series e Zone Budget e Mass Balance Visual MODFLOW Flex demo _ DRUMCO grid Run a9 File Tools D H Data Fo O BI Window Help Workflow i drumco Bevation 1 Define Modeling Objectives drumco Elevation 2 S E Define Numerical Model Mewes drumco Elevation 3 I Create Grid drumco Elevation 4 EJ impot Model drumco Elevation 5 EJ View Edit Grid drumco Elevation 6 EJ Define Properties EJ Define Boundary Conditions EEA Select the Next Step re I Define Zone Budget Zones j E Define Particles S E Select Run Type E Define Observation Zones E Define Observation Wells I PEST Run 14 VMod Imported Wells View Maps View Charts EJ Single Run E Translate B E Run Numerical Engines EJ MODFLOW 2005 EJ ZONEBUDGET EJ MODPATH Storage i M Initial Heads Boundary Conditions O Recharge C Evapotranspiration C Constant Heads C Constant Head 1 Rivers C River Q C River 1 Pren Wells C Pumping Wells Bou
66. the line type for the well path Choose between a solid line or a dashed line 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings Width Specify the width of the well paths Color Select a color the well paths Click the Apply button to view the change in an active 2D or 3D Window For information on the Labels node please see the Labels iss section Well Tops The Well Tops node provides options for changing the appearance of the well tops These options are described below General Operations Style Well Head Symbol General Circle id Labels Well Path Size General 4 Labels Transparency 0 Color Preview When the General subnode is selected the following options are available Symbol Select the well top symbology from the combo box Choose from various symbols including circle square cross diamond etc 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 163 VMOD Flex Help Size Specify the size of the well top symbols 6 4 4 Color Select a color for the well tops Click the Apply button to view the change in an active 2D or 3D Window For information on the Labels node please see the Labelsliss section Surfaces The following section describes the available style settings for Surface data objects To access the style settings right click on the surface data object in the Data Explorer and select Settings from the pop up
67. the pop up menu Then in the Settings dialog expand the Style node to view the style settings The Wells settings are divided into three sections Well Head Well Path and Well Tops Well Head The Well Head node provides options for changing the appearance of the well heads top of the wells General Operations Style Well Hea Symbol Circle Well Path Size Well Tops 5 Preview When the General subnode is selected the following options are available Symbol Select the well head symbology from the combo box Choose from various symbols including circle square cross diamond etc 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 161 VMOD Flex Help Size Specify the size of the well heads Color Select a color the well heads Click the Apply button to view the change in an active 2D or 3D Viewer For information on the Labels node please see Labelslisst section Well Path The Well Head node provides options for changing the appearance of the well path These options are described below General Operations Style Well Head General M Show Lines Labels Well Path Type General C Well Tops Width g Color Preview When the General subnode is selected the following options are available Show Lines Select this option to show hide the well path Type Specify
68. this step 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials a Ka B E Define Numerical Model i lll Create Grid A A View Edit Grid MO 00 USGS MODFLOW 2000 from SWS Define Properties USGS MODFLOW 2005 from SWS Bh Eana p Meera USGS MODFLOW LGR from SWS GEJ Select the Nex Step E Define Observation Zones ZONEBUDGET Define Observation Wells Define Zone Budget Zones Define Particles EJ Select Run Type E PEST Run i o EGG i Translate i Run Numerical Engines View Results e You will arrive at the Select Engines step Here you can choose what engines you want what version of MODFLOW 2000 2005 etc and if you want to include MODPATH and ZoneBudget in the run e MODFLOW 2005 should be selected by default e Click Next Step to proceed Translate Packages e You will arrive at the Translation Step 4 General Run Run Output Folder C Users Administrator Desktop VMO DFlex Projects demo_ Data M Start Date 9 15 2008 E MES i _Run Numerical Engines View Results At this step you choose if the model is steady state or transient choose the solver you want to use and define any other MODFLOW package run settings such as cell rewetting 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help etc Note in the General Settings there is a default location where the MODFLOW and ot
69. 1 Storage1 InitialHeads1 are the property values for the Parent Grid Conductivity Child grid1 Storage Child grid1 and InitialHeads Child grid 1 are the property values for ChildGrid1 The same convention applies for boundary condition cells there is one entry for the parent grid boundary cells and one entry for each of the child grid cells Model Explorer ana a i E Property Zone 1 i Property Zone 2 mulation Domain F Model Domain sy Boundary Conditions haC Constant Head west 5 C NumericalGrid1 E 3 0 LGR 6 E Runt S E pats L Conductivity Child grid1 L Storage Child grid1 g bitte tends Child grid1 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models 252 After a successful MODFLOW LGR run you will see multiple entries in the Output directory Heads for the parent grid and Heads for each of the child grids and likewise for Drawdown E C NumericalGiid1 a me 3 0 LGR Se El Runt E Ea Pr E Inputs f c A 4 G 3 b L C Boundary Condtions e C Constant Heads C Constant Head 1 Child grid1 fene Po Constant Head west 9 2 Converting to FEFLOW Quick Overview Instructions Create a FEFLOW FEM file by 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 253 VMOD Flex Help populating the selected mesh with data from the conceptual model
70. 1 26 2012 3 23 PM oe om e If you ran MODPATH you will see Pathlines appear as a new node in the tree under Output circled below add a check box beside the Pathlines to display these in the active 2D 3D Viewers 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials ss View Charts e Click on View Charts from the workflow tree and the following window will appear 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help sacram E L JEES FEEFFE a g n IGES8 8 g 8 Calculated m Calculated vs Observed Heads Time 1 274 314 334 Observed Head m 354 374 To the left of the chart window you can choose what observation data to view select individual wells or see wells that belong to a specific group After making a change to the well s selection click on the Apply button to update the chart e In the Charts toolbox under Chart Type select Time Series and the following window will appear 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s View Charts Pra l Apply Chart Type Time Series Time Series X 382 10922 Cale m 10932 Obs 12957 Calc 12957 Obs 12964 Calc A 12964 Obs 12082 Calc A 13082 Obs E Show All Observation 360 4 pg x
71. 2 by Schlumberger Water Services 5 VMOD Flex Help e View raw attribute data in a spreadsheet view e Apply mathematical operations to data e g set an attribute as a constant value convert well tops to a points data object and convert HGA cross section model layers to a points data object e Drape a raster image over a surface data object e g digital elevation models e Set symbol properties for points polygons polylines and display labels using a variety of style options e Color render shape features by attribute value using a classified or stretched color scheme e Show contour lines and set color rendering options for surface layers e Add remove and modify wells and associated well data including screens intervals diver observation points well tops well paths for horizontal only and pumping schedules Create surfaces from points data objects e Using one or more points data objects generate surface layers using Inverse Distance Kriging or Natural Neighbor interpolation methods e Configure the interpolation method by modifying various interpolation settings e Clip the generated surface to the horizontal extents of a specified polygon data object Digitize new data objects using 2D Viewer Using the 2D Viewer editing tools digitize a new polyline polygon or points data object 2D amp 3D Visualization e Visualize data objects and conceptual model features using interactive 2D and 3D Viewers e Use various screen configu
72. 2D Viewer 1 2D Viewer 2 Using Multiple Viewers VMOD Flex allows you to have multiple 2D and 3D Viewer windows opened and displayed at one time When a new viewer is opened it is added to the Viewer Bar located at the bottom of the main VMOD Flex Window You can change the current active viewer by clicking on a different viewer from the viewer bar 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 125 VMOD Flex Help Viewer Controls The viewer controls allow you to interact with displayed data objects The controls are accessible from the toolbar located along the right side of the viewer window View Mode The default mode Allows you to zoom rotate and pan the displayed data objects Pick Mode 2D Viewer Only Allows you to select individual data object elements currently displayed in the viewer When in Pick Mode the Edit button will be shown in the sidebar allowing you to edit the selected data object element Rotate Allows you to rotate the displayed data objects using your mouse Click and hold on the displayed data and move the mouse in a direction to rotate the data Available in 3D Viewer only Move Pan Allows you to move pan the displayed data objects in the viewer Zoom In Allows you to zoom in on the displayed data objects Zoom Out Allows you to zoom out of the displayed data objects Zoom Into box Use the mouse cursor to draw a box around an area of interest and automatically zoom into this area
73. 3 5 GB 01 2823 5 3123 5 o 536156 69 4814049 99999 2326 2626 2826 DE n 4814063399993 2325 2626 1 Ce 69 4814019 99999 2322 2622 s 535048 50935 Fi O Coe 4814069 99999 2330 5 2630 5 o 4814029 99999 2333 2633 2833 3133 gle 53549869 4814039 99999 2329 5 2629 5 geo p es e 2035 as 535295 69 4814029 99999 2338 2638 535232 69 4813999 99999 2339 5 2639 5 E p12 12 536225 92 4814281 79999 2325 93 2625 93 F 536129 740000 4814379 69999 2324 85 2624 85 E 2824 85 3124 85 14 536065 76 4814320 19999 2323 05 2623 05 CE N 535960 34 4814251 29999 2324 26 2624 26 16 535866 679999 4814349 39999 2326 56 2626 56 GB 16 2826 56 3126 56 bd lt Back Next gt gt Cancel He Next select the Coordinate System of the data being imported If the coordinate system is different than the one defined in the project settings VMOD Flex will perform a geotransformation converting all coordinates to the project s coordinate system Click the Next gt gt button to continue to the next step 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data S Data Import B Geographic information for the source data Coordinate Systems O x UTM Zone 17N Datum World Geodetic System 1984 m Local Coodinate System lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help Next set your Data Mapping by mapping columns in the source da
74. 34E 334DC1 x lly 574366 679999999 4862849 39999949 574366 679999999 4862900 45 34E 34ACD01 574366 679999999 4863050 48 34E 35CC001 574366 679999999 4863349 39999949 135 VMOD Flex Help 101 x Data To Display Active Well 45 34E 32BBD1 m Display Format Elevation Measured Depths Divers Well tops ID Top fm _ Bottom m 4S 34E 3B44B01 574520 4S 34E 3644001 574666 45 34E 36 BB01 574666 48 35E 07ACA01 574666 4S 35E 08CAB01 574720 45 35E 17CCA01 574800 45 35E 184BC01 574850 45 35E 184DC01 574850 4 35E 18DCC01 574850 45 35E 19BBB01 574850 4S 35E 29CBC1 574900 45 35E 30CBA01 575000 5S 33E 24CCC01 575000 5 33E 24CCC02 575075 5S 33E 24CCC03 575100 5S 34E 01CDA01 575150 4863349 39999949 4862849 39999949 4863000 4863349 39999949 4862849 39999949 4863050 4862849 39999949 4862999 4863050 4863349 39999949 4863120 4863349 39999949 4863200 4862925 4862849 39999949 4863000 Pumping Schedule Stat End Rate m 3 d The Well Heads table contains a list of all the wells in the data object The data stored in this table includes the Name X Y coordinates Elevation and Depth for each well When a well is selected its corresponding attribute data is displayed in the adjacent data tables e g Screens Pumping Schedule You can search for a well in the Well Heads table
75. 7 step To create a new horizon e From the Data Explorer select the surface data object that will be used to generate the horizon e Click the 2 Blue Arrow button to insert it into the Horizon Information table If the selected surface is greater than the conceptual model area it will be clipped by the conceptual model boundary polygon If the surface is less than the conceptual model area it will be extended to the conceptual model boundary Note Surfaces should be added from top to bottom starting with the top surface ground surface and ending with the bottommost surface e Click the Add Horizon button to add a new horizon row to the Horizon Information table e Inthe Name column type in a unique name for the horizon e Inthe Type column select the appropriate horizon type from the combo box For information on each horizon type please refer to Horizon Types he8 e Repeat the steps above to add additional horizons Remember you must have at least two horizons before VMOD Flex can create the structural zones e You can preview the horizons in 3D Viewer by clicking the Apply button 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 187 VMOD Flex Help Conceptual Model Define Modeling Objectives Collect Data Objects Define Conceptual Model Structure EJ Define Conceptual Model oe ome ee a ZJ Define Model Structure E E E E Horizon Infomation Surfaces Type gt ground Horizont Erosional gt lay2
76. 8 PM ZONE BUDGET Zone File translator Initialize C Rivers 12 49 28 PM ZONE BUDGET translator Active zones for Layer 1 O Rivero 1249 28 PM ZONE BUDGET translator Active zones for Layer 2 O Riveri 12 49 28 PM ZONE BUDGET translator Active zones for Layer 3 C Pumping Wells E 12 49 28 PM ZONE BUDGET translator Active zones for Layer 4 ite E 12 49 28 PM ZONE BUDGET translator Active zones for Layer 5 Pumping Wells Boundary Coi 12 49 28 PM ZONE BUDGET Zone Fie translator Finalize Zone Budget 12 49 28 PM HHHHHHHHHHH ZONE BUDGET Translation Finish HRRHHHRHHHHHH Particles 12 49 28 PM RHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Translation Finish HRHHRHHHHHHHHHHHHH su C Forward Particles C Backward Particles Flow Observation Wells nuts g m DRUMCO grid Run Translation finished successfully e Click the Next step button to proceed You will arrive at the Run Engines Step Run Engines 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help Visual MODFLOW Flex demo_ DRUMCO grid Run on W File Tools Window Help Workflow E D H si O OF Data LE drumco Bevation 1 S E Define Modeling Objectives Run Model 1 dumco Bevation 2 a Define Numerical Model 19 drumco Elevation 3 I Create Grid Pils C1 drumco Bevation 4 Import Model 1 drumco Elevation 5 View Edt Grid Stress Period Time Step HCE drumco
77. ATH Translation Star stttsseettesteetts 12 48 28 PM MODPATH MAIN data fie Initialize 12 49 28 PM MODPARH translator Active cells for Layer 1 12 49 28 PM MODPARH translator Active cells for Layer 2 12 49 28 PM MODPARH translator Active cells for Layer 3 12 49 28 PM MODPARH translator Active cells for Layer 4 12 49 28 PM MODPARH translator Active cells for Layer 5 Model Explorer 3 Wells Boundary Condition a Wid 12 49 28 PM MODPATH MAIN data file Finalize 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Starting Forward Particles Locations Fie Initialize ts 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Starting Forward Particles Locations File Finalize Properties 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Forward Respond Fie Intialize 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Forward Respond File Finalize C Pow 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Name Fie Initialize t C Conductivity 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Name File Finalize l C Storage 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Starting Backward Particles Locations File Initialize p L IntialHeads 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Starting Backward Particles Locations File Finalize 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Backward Respond Fie Intialize Boundary Conditions 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Backward Respond File Finalize O Recharge 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Name File Initialize Evapotranspiration 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Name Fle Finalize C Constant Heads 12 49 28 PM saeteesttestttsetteetteet MODPATH Translation Finish sttsettteettesetsettee C Constant Head 12 49 28 PM RHHHHHHHHHH ZONE BUDGET Translation Stat S RHHRHHEHHEH n 12 49 2
78. Animation Parameters The following options are available 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Visualizing Data in 2D 3D r a Animation Parameters V Rotate E Transient Time Rotate Time E Rotate on X axis E Rotate on Y axis V Rotate on Z axis Video Write Video File D apritest0 avi Rotate will allow you to rotate the model domain around the specified axis lf you wish to save to a video file select the check box beside Write Video File and specify a name and directory The combo box below this allows you to specify the video resolution If you click on the Time tab you will have options to specify the start and end time and the number of time frames These options are only appropriate if you are animating Heads or Drawdown that has multiple output times 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 2 VMOD Flex Help Gi ad Animation Parameters V Rotate E Transient Time 11 18 1858 v End T 11 18 1858 Max Time 3 29 2012 E 3 29 2012 Time steps 5 a Y T Write Video File D apritest0 avi Click OK after defining the desired Animation settings Then right click on the 3D viewer and select Animate and the rotation will start If you have selected to record a video file then the video recording will begin Once you are done recording right click on the 3D viewer again and select Animate to stop the animation A
79. Bevation 6 Define Properties iA VMod Imported Wells Define Boundary Conditions GI Select the Next Step E I Define Observation Zones Residual E Define Observation Wells E Define Zone Budget Zones E Define Particles S E Select Run Type E PEST Run EJ Single Run Translate S E R og oz eh H O Vie Model Explorer Wells Boundary Condition ri juts Properties J m O Fow hterations C Conductivity Change Di Storage C intialHeads Boundary Conditions O Recharge Evapotranspiration O Constant Heads C Constant Head 1 O Rivers C River 0 i C River 1 C Pumping Wells z i C Pumping Wells Boundary Coi Zone Budget Particles O Forward Partides C Backward Particles Flow T Observation Wells a hterations n e DRUMCO orid Run e Click the Play button circled above to start running the engines You will see the Engine progress in the scrolling window output and also in chart format e Note that after a successful run the Heads and Pathlines items will be added the tree in the model explorer e Once finished Click the Next step button to proceed View Results e You can then choose to view results in the form of Maps Contours and Color shading or Charts 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials O OF drumco Elevation 1 5 EJ Define Modeling Objectives drumco Elevation 2 B E Define Numerical Model drumco Bevation 3 B Create Grid
80. Caution The AVI recording can be memory and CPU intensive The performance will depend on the size of the model you are visualizing and the hardware on your computer memory CPU video driver Please be patient while this is recording 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Visualizing Data in 2D 3D Exporting Views To export a 2D Viewer to a graphics file e g BMP TIF GIF JPEG follow the steps below e Right click anywhere within the viewer e Select Export Current View to Image from the pop up menu e A Save As window will display allowing to you specify the location on your computer where the graphics file will be saved To export a 3D Viewer to a graphics files follow the steps below e Right click anywhere within the viewer e Select Save as image from the pop up menu e The following dialog box will display on your screen ioix Image Size 3200 2400 Width Height File Name Eag OK Cancel a e Select the desired image size from the Image Size combo box If you select Custom then specify the desired image dimensions in the Height and Width combo boxes e Click the button and specify a folder location on your computer to save the image file e Click the Ok button to save the image 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 131 VMOD Flex Help 6 Data Settings VMOD Flex allows you to view and modify various settings and properties for each imported or digiti
81. D Kx Ky Kz ZonelD Ss Sy Tp total porosity Ep effective porosity ZonelD Initial Heads ZonelD Recharge Rate ZonelD Evapotranspiration Rate Extinction Depth Head Drawdown e Select the Color Classification by default the colors will be calculated from the min and max values for the current data object VMOD provides an option to use Project wide Color Palettes This is useful when you have multiple data objects that are rendering the same attribute e g heads from different model runs conductivity distributions and you want to make qualitative comparisons between these This is challenging when each data object has its own min and max values and are colored based on this However this becomes much easier when these data objects all read from a common color palette If this option is checked on you can access the color palette and adjust min and max values See Project Color Palettes 1s for more details e For the selected attribute you can define various settings These settings are described below Type Select between Stretched or Classified The stretched option allows for color shading i e continuous color gradient The classified option allows for discrete intervals i e zebra in the color gradient Classes There are two options for defining the number of classes to be used Number of Classes and Equal Intervals Number of Classes Specify the number of color classes in the text box Equal
82. Domain Preview J 3D Viewer 1 NumericalGridl Run Sample Run1 Conceptual Model Quick Overview Instructions Define geological surfaces for your conceptual model and provide Horizon hierarchy rules Pre requisites Two or more surface data objects have been created or imported n Result Horizons and Structural Zones are created Next Steps Define Property Zones h92 At this step you define the geological structure for the conceptual model by converting surfaces to Horizons Horizons are stratigraphic layers 2D surfaces with topography that define the upper and lower boundaries of the structural zones in a conceptual model In VMOD Flex horizons are created by clipping or extending interpolated surface data objects to the boundary of the conceptual model When horizons are created VMOD Flex will automatically generate the Structural Zones geologic formations between the horizons which can be used later to define property 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 186 zones This segment is separated into the following sections e Defining Horizons teel e Explanation of Horizon Types haa e View Structural Zoneshoi Defining Horizons 9 Before You Start Make sure you have all the surface data objects that you want to use to construct the geological model Surfaces can be created or imported as explained at the Collect Data Objects h
83. E 302 ONIRE aa aKo E PEPE E E A E E E E E eeu hee alae bea ceuaaeeass 304 MOGPATH ETT E TT T E TE TT AE TE 306 Discharge Options iv beet E A a ieee es eee eae 306 Reference Time iii an tries ownage aerial nee eee a A ads eas aS A ec ee eae 308 11 RUM NUMEFICAIIENBINGS O a a a aae a A E a a a e a E a a ERE 309 UZ View Results csnsavasbcdeccadecbcssdedebacadeucsadedsssacchnssvcacoussnsschdcusdesosaccsuascsosdnssuadesdaudendensendccbaciesicoasiscuseesocans 310 Contours and Color FlOOS wicc5 ccccccsccccceseeusvesaseascacesasseoceseyoisessanonsccseeetseivesessessbnsonensnnceboesindesersuanscaonaacsessedsseossereesscnens 311 CM aArtS gt E E E T EE AE E EEE touevavessuscuecuetesectysdcunesosuenasdesdesessessestsisecssts 314 Compare Heads and Drawdown eerren aa a a a aa aaa S aE E ES r ES EE 316 13 Duplicating Models Oja a Aichi e a aaa ae 318 TA Expoit OOo sss aaa aaas a aaa a aaa Eaa AE raa ae cccssssseedececatesdueduoavescosnssconesiessocsadses 320 Part 11 Working with Multiple Model Scenarios 324 Part 12 References 328 Index 330 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 1 VMOD Flex Help 1 Introduction VMOD Flex is a powerful software package that provides the tools for building three dimensional groundwater conceptual and numerical models using raw GIS data objects The conceptual model approach to groundwater modeling allows you to e Build a conceptual model of the groundwater system prior to the simulation The
84. Engines Define Calbratoa e Click the Compose Engines button to proceed Alternatively the Next step button will take you to this step as it is pre define as the default step 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help __Descrption USGS MODFLOW 96 from SWS al a v al v S e You will arrive at the Select Engines step Here you can choose what engines you want what version of MODFLOW 2000 2005 etc and if you want to include MODPATH and ZoneBudget in the run e MODFLOW 2005 should be selected by default if you wish to run MODPATH and ZoneBudget be sure to select these engines as well e Click Next Step to proceed Translate Packages e You will arrive at the Translation Step Run Run Output Folder C Users Administrator Desktop VMODFlex Projects demo_ Data M Start Date 9 15 2008 View Results At this step you choose if the model is steady state or transient choose the solver you want to use and define any other MODFLOW package run settings such as cell rewetting etc For more details see MODFLOW Translation Settings b78 Note in the General 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials Settings there is a default location where the MODFLOW and other files will be generated you can modify the location if you wish e Click the button circled above to proceed this will read the input from
85. FLOW Boundary Conditions CHD DRN RCH etc Pumping Wells or Surface Water Network currently under construction e Click on the Define Boundary Conditions button 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help a File Tools Window Help Workflow 8x uaa O E O Data Ho ground EJ Define Modeling Objectives NextState DE layer2top Collect Data Objects 1 layer2bottom Define Conceptual Model CHD Time d Rate m3 d OO boundary Define Model Structure WG chdeast Define Property Zones DR ol 150 WG chd west a Select the Next Step 30 175 WG rivers 6 2 Define Boundary Conditions 60 200 I Define Surface Water Ne RC 30 ET I Define Pumping Wells a I Define Boundary Condit 120 200 ji S Ta Define Pumping Wells ec Define Surface Water Network Model Explorer aR ree S E Conceptual Model 1 C Model Boundary Z Zonet L E Zone2 iy Properties Conductivity Property Zone 1 L Property Zone 2 S E Simulation Domain L Model Domain L C Boundary Conditions i g e The Define Boundary Condition dialog box will appear on your screen as explained in the following section Define Boundary Conditions e Atthis step you can define flow boundaries for the model e From the Select Boundary Condition Type combo box select the desired boundary condition type e Constant Head e Type name Constant Head Ea
86. Horizon2 Conformable 3 lay3 Horizon3 Conformable gt Exaggeration 46 e Finally click the button to create the horizons and proceed to the next step Once created the horizons will be added to the Conceptual Model Tree under the Horizons node shown below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 188 Conceptual Model E 4 Conceptual Model i C Model Boundary cy Structure i EF Horizons C Horizon2 C Horizon3 C Horizon4 C Horizon5 i C Horizon io Horizon H P Zones E Properties i C Simulation Domain Horizon Types Each horizon can be assigned a particular type which defines the relationship to other horizons in the conceptual model This prevents intersecting layers and establishes layers that satisfy both FEFLOW and MODFLOW requirements Each horizon type is described below Erosional horizons can be used as the highest or as an intermediate horizon but not as the bottom of the conceptual model This type of horizon will truncate all horizons below it including the base horizon Base horizons can be used as the lowest horizon in the conceptual model Any conformable horizon types will lap onto it while all erosional or discontinuity horizons will truncate it 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 189 VMOD Flex Help Discontinuity horizons represent an erosional surface in the mid
87. Horizons grid to insert it into the Horizon Information table See the example below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 25 VMOD Flex Help O OF Define Modeling Objectives Collect Data Objects Define Conceptual Model J Define Model Structure 00000 Define Conceptual Model Structure oE bE E E Preven create Horizon Information Name Horizon2 Horizon3 e For this example the default horizon type will be adequate For information on each horizon type please refer to Horizon Types hsa e Repeat the steps above to add additional horizons e From the Data Explorer select the layer2 top surface data object click the 3 button in Row2 of the Horizons grid to insert it into the grid e From the Data Explorer select the layer2 bottom surface data object click the 3 button in the Row3 of Horizons grid to insert it into the grid NOTE Horizons must be added from the topmost geological layers and working downwards e You can preview the horizons in the adjacent 3D Viewer by clicking the Preview button e Once finished you should see a display similar to the one shown below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials Define Modeling Objectives Collect Data Objects Define Conceptual Model Structure Define Conceptual Model I GE f J Define Model Structure E b 2 LB Preven cose De erty Z Horizon Information i Surf
88. Hydraulic conductivity in the direction of the model X axis e Ky Hydraulic conductivity in the direction of the model Y axis e Kz Hydraulic conductivity in the direction of the model Z axis These Conductivity parameters may be defined on a cell by cell basis using constant property values and or distributed property values When importing or assigning the Conductivity property zones VMOD Flex will require valid data for each of the above parameters Anisotropy The reason Visual MODFLOW prompts for both Kx and Ky is because there are two options for defining the horizontal anisotropy of the Conductivity property zones e Anisotropy by layer 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 269 VMOD Flex Help e Anisotropy as specified Note The anisotropy option is set in Translation settings see Anisotropybo2 for more details If the Anisotropy by layer option is used the Kx value will determine the conductivity in the X direction and the specified anisotropy ratio Ky Kx for each layer will be used to calculate the Ky value for each grid cell If the Anisotropy as specified option is used the model will use the Kx and Ky values defined for each property zone Storage e Ss specific storage e Sy specific yield e Eff Por effective porosity e Tot Por total porosity Specific Storage Ss is defined as the volume of water that a unit volume of aquifer releases from storage under a unit decline in hydraulic h
89. Ky value of 2 5x10 4 cm s to the entire aquifer This value would be adjusted up or down for calibration purposes within the range of values reported If a reasonable calibration cannot be achieved using this conceptual model it may be necessary to sub divide this region into several zones to accommodate local irregularities in the flow pattern However almost all modeling textbooks strongly recommend to start out simple first and get as close a solution as possible and then make the model more complex if necessary Distributed Value Property Zones The Distributed Value Property Zones approach is currently only available for Conductivity Storage Initial Heads Initial Concentrations and Dispersivity properties This approach is a little more complicated because it involves linking a property zone to one or more parameter distribution arrays containing data interpolated from scattered observation points When a property zone is linked to distribution array the property values assigned to each grid cell within that zone are calculated by multiplying the zone parameter value with the corresponding value from the parameter distribution array If the grid spacing from the model does not match the grid spacing from the distribution array a bivariate interpolation scheme is used to calculate the appropriate parameter value at the center of the model grid cell using the four nearest data nodes in the parameter distribution array Conductivity e Kx
90. MOD Flex supports e MODFLOW 2000 e MODFLOW 2005 e MODFLOW LGR e Zone Budget and e MODPATH Click Next Step to proceed 10 2 Define Numerical Model The next step is to choose to Import an Existing Model or Create an Empty Grid 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Visual MODFLOW Flex demo_ Numerical Model ag File Tools Window Help Workflow D gH Data 9 OE Numerical Modeling Workflow 260 8x Define Grid Import Model Create Grid Model Explorer Import Model You can import a Visual MODFLOW project or a USGS MODFLOW 2000 2005 data set 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 261 VMOD Flex Help 10 3 A Before You Start VMOD Flex currently supports flow simulations only If you need to modify or maintain a model that utilizes any of the following features you must continue to use Visual MODFLOW Classic interface for this gt PEST gt Transport MT3DMS MT3D99 RT3D PHT3D SEAWAT gt MODFLOW SURFACT MODFLOW 96 MODFLOW NWT gt MNW Package gt ETS1 Package When you click on the Import Model button the following dialog will appear To import your Visual MODFLOW project select the VMF file and click OK to continue Once the model is finished importing click Next Step to proceed Create Grid This option is currently
91. MODFLOW Modele cscscssscscscssscecscssssssssesscesssesesesssesesssscesssesesesesesscesesesecesesetscesesetsceseseteeeees 110 3 Creating Surfaces O E aa a a a E a G e a a aaa 112 4 Creating New Data Objects jra aa aa a aea aae a a a e aea Sa Aa Sar ia a NEA Eaa 118 Bi Del ting Data Objects O cvcsecsasesscscesecscscedchasseeeveicadesddecscesadasdecsebeiacccsossacdecsacssvesdesedostsndendeswerzcbectossceactbeeseaseders 121 Part 5 Visualizing Data in 2D 3D 122 Part 6 Data Settings 131 1 General Settings 2 Data Table 3 Data Operations 4 Style Settings Points Polylines AnG POlVZONS ssiri r sssi o iudas a a a r a es a E e esate raS 149 Cross Sections 157 Wells 160 SUITACESS E E T E E ous deaseunabnadaciovecseiestsevetistesdedsadsatcceccsevelacteel outsddevesiatsitestevedabine 163 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 4 VMOD Flex Help Part 7 an u A U N F Part 8 Part 9 Part 10 uw A U N F O O N Q 10 3D Gridded Data me aaaeeeaeo e eeoa aa aE eee E EE o E aanas 166 Conceptual Modeling Workflow 177 Define Modeling ObDjectives zesccsscsccscccccccetisvecsscsccceictacsoeedcossossesetecnssve custeecsccusiecusscesdenssadensossdseesasteecssesstewetsosec ne 178 C ll ct Data Obj cts i avassssnsseiccscssstasedstsnesesswsndesaccueadseesedsasedsedonsceaceueseesbsgasedobinscesssadedevSinbecadednasceossdshessdsbzatens 179 Create New Conceptual MOE sicsciiciscsccicseisdstesntsndsvsesseesccassssssceuvs
92. Modifying Viewer Settings The following settings are available in both 3D and 2D Viewers e Changing the Background Color To change the background color of a 2D or 3D Viewer right click anywhere within the viewer and select Background Color from the pop up menu The Color combo box will display on your screen Select a new color and then click the OK button e Showing the Viewer Axis To show or hide the viewer axis right click anywhere within the viewer and select Axis from the pop up menu The following settings only apply to 3D Viewers e Setting the Vertical Exaggeration The Vertical Exaggeration is the ratio of the scale of the Y axis to the scale of the X axis Vertical exaggeration can be used for discerning subtle topographic features or when the data covers a large horizontal distance miles relative to the relief feet By default the vertical exaggeration is set to 0 You can change the vertical exaggeration using the Exaggeration text box located at the bottom of the 3D Viewer shown below e Resetting the Viewer To zoom out to the full extents of your data click the Reset 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Visualizing Data in 2D 3D Scene Position button located at the bottom of the viewer Please note that clicking this button will reset the rotation and zoom level back to the original view configuration 3D Viewer Creating Cutaways VMOD Flex allows you to remove portions of the model from the 3D View
93. OO sy HD on amp wl nr Re alnlalalalalaalaa my o The Time Steps option is only available when you are running a transient model i e when Transient Flow run type is selected For transient flow simulations VMOD Flex will automatically merge all of the different time periods defined for all of the different pumping wells and boundary conditions into the uniform stress period format required by MODFLOW A stress period is defined as a time period in which all the stresses boundary conditions pumping rates etc on the system are constant Unfortunately the data collected for each modeling site is rarely synchronized in terms of stress periods so VMOD Flex merges the time schedules for all pumping wells and boundary conditions to determine the length of each stress period for a transient simulation As a result the user cannot directly modify the number of stress periods or the length of each stress period The Time step options window as shown in the following figure is used to define the number of Time steps in each stress period and the time step Multiplier is used to increment each time step size The Period column indicates the stress period number while the Start and Stop columns indicate the start time and stop time respectively for each stress period 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 281 VMOD Flex Help Each stress period is divided into a user defined number of T
94. Particles stop in cells were discharge greater total inflow MODFLOW 2005 Discharge Persentage 25 Settings Recharge Options IRCHTP Fux is assigned to the top face of all cells Time Steps Evapotranspiration Options IEVTTP Aux is assigned to the top face of all cells Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Settings Anisotropy By Layer Output Control MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Week Sink Option Week Sink Option Recharge EVT Options The Recharge Options are used to define how MODPATH treats the Recharge flow entering the system The Recharge Options are e Recharge flux is treated as internal sources and sinks for all cells e Recharge flux is assigned to the top face of all cells The first option treats recharge as a distributed source entering the cell from all sides while the second option treats recharge as though it is entering only through the top face of the cell According to the MODPATH reference manual the distributed source approximation for areal recharge is usually only appropriate for two dimensional areal flow models The Evapotranspiration Options are the same as described for Recharge above 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow sos 10 10 2 2 Reference Time The Reference Time is used by MODPATH as the time datum for the simulation of both forward and backward tracking particles This option is only applicable f
95. Please take a moment to review the summary below to help you decide where you should start Conceptual Modeling Recommended for Creating New Models Use this option if you e Are starting a new modeling project and have various data types formats GIS etc for defining the geological layering flow materials and boundary conditions e Are dealing with complex geological layering pinchouts and discontinuities e Wish to evaluate multiple numerical grids for your project e Wish to build a conceptual model for FEFLOW The Conceptual Modeling tutorial will walk you through the following steps e Loading your raw data e Defining the Geological Structure Defining the Properties and Boundaries e Defining a Grid or Mesh e Converting this to a Numerical Model Start the Tutorial hs Numerical Modeling For Existing Models Use this option if you want to e Create a MODFLOW based numerical model define the numerical grid and populate the grid the properties and boundary conditions similar to conventional Visual MODFLOW e Import a Visual MODFLOW project set VMF 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials e Import a standard USGS MODFLOW data set MODFLOW 2000 2005 Start the Tutoriall s2 See Also Several sample projects are available for download from our website that illustrate both the conceptual and numerical modeling workflows 3 1 Conceptual Modeling The following example is
96. Riverbed conductivity 0 01 m s r Edit Boundary Condition Points PolylineO Zones Pomo Point14 Select how the attributes are defined Define forthe entire zone C Define values at vertices Linear Interpolation Just start and end points e Click Finish The River conceptual boundary condition will be added to the model tree The following display will appear 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help Conceptual Model 9 OF Define Modeling Objectives NextState Collect Data Objects QU Www Define Conceptual Model LIYE Si F RA S E Select the Next Step RIN AA J Define Boundary Conditions ay A SAN Define Finite Difference Grid Define Finite Element Mesh I Define Surface Water Ne E Define Pumping Wells Define Boundary Conditc 3 0 Select Grid Type I View Finite Bement Mesh View Finite Difference Grid Translate to FEFLOW Model Convert to MODFLOW Model Next you can define a Finite Difference Grid or a Finite Element Mesh e Click the Define Finite Difference Grid button and define the inputs as explained in the following section Define Grid 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s e Define Numerical Grid lelak Name NumericalGrid1 Define Horizontal Grid Rotation 0 Add Data Object _ Grid Size Rows Cell He
97. Select from Model Geology or Hydrogeology When a interpretation layer is selected from the combo box its associated cross sections are listed in the grid below Under the Visible column select which cross section to show hide in 3D Viewer Select the Show All check box to show all the cross sections for the selected interpretation layer Select the Show Labels check box to show the label for each cross section Wells The wells node contains settings for changing the appearance of the cross section wells 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 159 VMOD Flex Help These settings are described below General Operations Style Interpretation M Show Wells Tl Show Labels Line Style _ _ Kh x Line Width Preview Apply OK Cancel Help Show Wells Check this option to show the well geometry Show Labels Check this option to show the well label above each well Line Style Select the type of line to display Choose between solid or dashed Line Width Specify the width of the wells Color Change the color of the wells Click the Apply button to display the changes in an active 3D Viewer window 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 6 4 3 Wells The following section describes the available style settings for Wells data objects To access the style settings right click on the well data object in the Data Explorer and select Settings from
98. Software Visual MODFLOW Flex Note If you are using dongle based hardware licensing please ensure that your dongle is connected to your computer AFTER you have installed the software and that you have properly configured your installation 1 2 How to buy You can buy VMOD Flex directly through your local sales representative via e mail ohone or online through the shopping cart on our website using VISA or Mastercard Direct order link and VMOD Flex Software homepage Order link iwww swstechnology com Locate your local distributor http www swstechnology com groundwater services contact E mail a SWS Sales Representative I sws sales slb com 1 3 Features VMOD Flex supports the following coordinate systems e Geographic coordinate systems data import only e Projected coordinate systems UTM StatePlane e Local Cartesian Work With Grid Independent Data Import spatial and attribute data from a wide variety of data types including e Points XLS TXT CSV MDB SHP DXF TRP e Polygons SHP DXF e Polylines SHP DXF e 3D Gridded Data HDS DAT e Raster Images BMP TIF JPG e Time Schedules XLS e Surfaces DEM GRD TXT ASC e Hydro GeoAnalyst HGA Cross Sections 3XS e Vertical and Horizontal Wells XLS View and modify settings for imported data e View data object meta data including the source file name field mappings and the native coordinate system 201
99. VMOD Flex Help Head in Cell Impermeable Walls E frenat t Oriy Oriy Oriy Qriv Schematic of River Boundary Required Data The MODFLOW River Package input file requires the following information for each grid cell containing a River boundary e River Stage The free water surface elevation of the surface water body This elevation may change with time e Riverbed Bottom The elevation of the bottom of the seepage layer bedding material of the surface water body e Leakance A numerical parameter representing the resistance to flow between the surface water body and the groundwater caused by the seepage layer riverbed The Leakance value C may be calculated from the length of a reach L through a cell the width of the river W in the cell the thickness of the riverbed M and the vertical hydraulic conductivity of the riverbed material K using the following formula _KxLxWw M C For situations where the River package is used to simulate lakes or wetlands the L and W variables would correspond to the X Y dimension of the River boundary grid cells When a River boundary condition is assigned the Use default Leakance option is 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow as automatically selected If the Use default Leakance option is selected the River boundary condition requires the following data e River Stage The free water surface elevation of the surface water body
100. Visual MODFLOW Flex User Documentation Contents 3 Table of Contents Foreword 0 Part 1 Introduction 1 1 Installation and Licensing 2 How to buy 3 Features Part 2 Program Overview 8 t GMaInNIMeNU j _ s _ainicecadasecsscbnesnstasasascccsacassosentedonsoaverdssbondenboctesscoscasessessvicvosonensncdseicccnsdsscecssesatenceaevdessaes 12 Part 3 Quick Start Tutorials 17 1 Conceptual MOd ling sangscscssesadeavetscesnvasecseustentesgeadoesteees rai penaa ai aaa ao det a aa aa aaiae reaa ea oi aiaa oV sonha paiite 18 2 Importing VMOD MODFLOW Modelg scscssscscscssssscscssssscscsssescscsssssescsssssesesessseseseeceesessesseseesessesesesesesesesesesesesees 52 3 Working with HydroGeoBuilder projectS eseseseseseseseseesoessososcececscscscscseseseseseseseseseseeseesessoscecececscsceesesesesesesessseseese 68 Part 4 Working with Your Data 70 1 Importing Data ibssisasteveacsccesvosessnsscentscnsscennsscessevesynedusvastacsecsoaseatecsensensscesonsensbaeiadadneesevsovsessivestvessstseseess 71 POINTS lt weeetapecece N a S A T cocuns owes dasa ces ES A R AE N NE AN E 71 P lylihes O e a a a e e Ea A a E A Eaa 80 POIYBONS OO a E E r a a a e ea S A E N Aaa ea EEE 82 Surfac S EO Era Aa Ar E oae Ea SEO a E E O AEO a ALORA ENAA AAE Ssa eaae raS Enns sa E Ea EASE SEKR ORERE AREEN S E e E E E A A EE 3D Gridded Data Cross Sections Maps gt oee e A T E T A 2 Importing VMOD
101. aces Name Type I oT ground Horizont Erosional oc layer2 bottom Horizon3 Conformable a gt a layer2 top Horizon2 Conformable pi Preview Exaggeration 1 Sa Lae en Sas eae 5000 Le 15000 e Finally click the Ly button to create the horizons and proceed to the next step Define Property Zones Once you have imported sufficient raw data into your project you can begin to construct one or more conceptual models using imported or digitized data objects as building blocks At this step you can view edit the flow properties for the model There are two ways to define property zones Using Structural Zones or Using Polygon Data Objects 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help kd fas a File Tools Window Help Workflow 8X D H O OF amp Data amp ground EJ Define Modeling Objectives Define Property Zones layer2top EJ Collect Data Objects amp layer2bottom EJ Define Conceptual Model i REE O boundary EJ Define Model Structure Create New Property Zone Method Select one or more structural zones Property Zones MG chd east J Define Property Zones E AZ chdwest es Use Structural Zone s uss MZ rivers ao Structural Z Use Polygon Data Object Es Name Description Save Property Values Group of parameters to define Model Explorer S Conceptual Model 1 Model Boundary c Structure Ho
102. alue field e Select the color method from the Color box The isosurface can be displayed as a solid color Custom or rendered by a specified attribute ByAttribute e Use the Visible check box to show hide the isosurface e Use the Show Border check box to display hide a color map of the element value on the borders sides of the model domain when the isosurface intersects the edge of the model domain e Use the Show in Cutaway check box to make the isosurface visible invisible in cutaways e Use the transparent check box to enable disable transparency If enabled use the Transparency slider to set the level of transparency opaqueness e Click the Add button to create the isosurface The isosurface will be added to the isosurface table Modifying an Isosurface To modify an existing isosurface follow the steps below e Select the isosurface from the isosurface table e Make the modifications to the desired settings e g attribute name attribute value color etc e Click the Change button to apply the changes Time 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings General Transient Attributes Time Schedule 31 12 2003 12 00 00 4M 30 12 2007 12 00 00 4M 29 12 2011 12 00 00 4M 28 12 2015 12 00 00 4M 27 12 2019 12 00 00 4M Active Time 17 11 1858 12 00 00 AM The Time node provides a list of all the time steps in the 3D gridded data object and allows you to select the desired time step data to
103. and EVT End Se le Heads DDown F Tem Heads DDown F Tem Budget inte 14 0608 1 1 cue 30 9338 1 2 F F F Initial Heads 51 1813 1 3 Anisotropy 75474 h 4 q Settings Anisotropy By Layer 104 6349 1 5 Output Control 139 6227 1 6 yop sien Options Wiem A 7 Time Format 231 9904 1 8 292 4493 1 9 365 0 1 10 T 7 7 7 379 0608 2 1 Za 395 9338 2 2 F F F F 416 1813 2 3 440 4784 2 4 469 6349 2 5 504 6227 2 6 546 608 2 7 F F F F F F F 596 9904 2 8 657 4493 2 9 730 0 2 10 7 7 7 7 744 0608 3 1 760 9338 3 2 F F F 781 1813 3 3 805 4784 3 4 834 6349 3 5 869 6227 3 6 911 608 3 7 F F F F F F F 961 9904 3 8 1022 4493 3 9 Each MODFLOW simulation can produce three binary output files and one ASCII output file e Binary head file modelname HDS e Binary drawdown file modelname DDN e Binary flow file modelname BGT e ASCII listing file modelname LST The binary files contain head drawdown and flow exchange values for each grid cell while the ASCII listing file contains all relevant information on the operation of MODFLOW and the simulation results The listing LST file is useful if errors occur during a simulation and you 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services sos VMOD Flex Help want to know how far MODFLOW progressed or if you want to examine head or drawdown values at given intervals For a steady state simulation only one set of values for each grid cell are written to these files However f
104. and modify the geometry of points polylines and polygon data objects The process of drawing in a 2D Viewer is described below e Open a 2D Viewer by selecting Window from the VMOD Flex main menu and then clicking New 2D Window e Next display the data object that will be edited in the 2D Viewer Note You can have multiple data objects displayed in the viewer while you re editing drawing the data object However make sure that the data object being edited is the active one by selecting the data object name from the Layer combo box located at the bottom of the 2D Viewer window e From the 2D Viewer sidebar select the Pick button to set the 2D Viewer to pick mode Pick mode allows you to click and select individual shape elements e g vertices line segments features that comprise the active data object e From the 2D Viewer sidebar select the Edit button to set the 2D Viewer to edit mode Once this button is selected a set of editing buttons will display in the 2D Viewer sidebar The edit buttons that show in the sidebar will vary depending on which type of data object is being edited For example the Add Points button will not be shown when you are editing creating a polygon or polyline data object The edit buttons are described below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 120 Add Points Digitize points in the 2D Viewer by moving the mouse cursor to the desired location and clicking the
105. ards equation Translation Format The output FEM file generated by VMOD Flex during translation is currently compatible with FEFLOW v 5 3 11 or later Start Date The default start date is the date specified in the conceptual model settings The Start Date of the model is the date corresponding to the beginning of the simulation This date is relevant only for transient flow simulations where recorded field data may be used for defining time schedules for selected boundary conditions Start Time Specify the simulation start time The Start Time of the model is the time corresponding to the beginning of the simulation This time is relevant only for transient flow simulations where recorded data may be imported for defining time schedules for selected boundary conditions Steady State Simulation Time A steady state simulation time is required for Steady State Flow simulation This parameter is not used if you have selected Transient Flow Although the simulation will always be run to 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models 256 the same equilibrium solution in Steady State the total amount of water passing through boundary conditions i e the cumulative value of the solution depends on the amount of time simulated r Translate to Finite Element Model Translate FEFLOW Conditions Iv Material In Out Flow Well boundary Pumpingell1 BC 4th kind Rec
106. ata the following data must exist in separate columns in your source data e X e Y e Elevation e Attribute 1 optional e g conductivity e Attribute 2 optional e g layer 2 elevation e etc To import points data follow the steps below e Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu The import dialog will open lolx Data Source Data Type Point E Source File El Name Description zi res RCS Select Points from the Data Type drop down list Click the button and locate the source file 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help Enter a Name and a Description optional for the imported data and click Next to continue e The next step allows you to preview the source data before importing and will vary depending on which file type is selected For CSV and TXT files shown below select the appropriate delimiter from the Delimiters frame e g if it is a CSV file you would select comma Specify which row to start importing from using the From row selector alo x Delimiters From row MV Space T Comma 1 MV Tab I Slash P Other m Preview Source Data Row Column 1 mw 4 740 1612 1 178 31 1 183 55 rw 95 1295 17565 118348 m7 5 TOR AT7 1 10903 mw 8 885 814 1 177 27 1 183 1 mow 10 1170 1210 1 183 18 1 183 45 C CEA C C E 9 mw 19 885 1335 1 176 57
107. ater Services 7 2 179 VMOD Flex Help Visual MODFLOW Flex Example Conceptual Model ca x a9 File Tools Window Help Workflow 8x D ga 0 0E Data e Define Modeling Objectives Cd ERE EJ Flow Simulation a Flow type Available Engines Information d e 3 USGS MODFLOW 2000 from SWS e USGS MODFLOW 2005 from SWS So USGS MODFLOW LGR from SWS IMODPATH Simulation type Groundwater Flow x Model Explorer Click Next Step to proceed Collect Data Objects At this step in the workflow you collect the data you want to use to build and interpret your conceptual model The conceptual modeling workflow is data driven This means that you first need to collect the appropriate data objects in order to use these at a particular step in the workflow Data objects can be collected through several means 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 180 Visual MODFLOW Flex Example Conceptual Model Caner ag File Tools Window Help Workflow ee D H Daa Data Create New Data Object Model Explorer Create Surface gt Importing Datal71 Import GIS data shapefiles CAD files Gridded data images points wells in excel spreadsheets or XYZ points in text format gt Creating Data Objects h13 digitizing new point
108. ation hardware If problems are encountered with the vendor provided drivers e g poor on screen display performance then VMOD Flex provides the option to use the Microsoft Driver for OpenGL Virtual Grid Depending on the size of your model VMOD Flex may run very slowly during rotations or when data is moved in the 3D Viewer In this situation the virtual grid option may be used to increase the speed of the data processing and image rendering It can be used to set up a uniformly spaced grid with a specified number of rows and columns The virtual grid option will interpolate the data from the model to the uniformly spaced virtual grid This allows a smaller amount of information to be processed much faster However this also results in a loss of resolution of the data and some local scale minimum and maximum values may be missed If you are experiencing performance issues try lowering the number of cells on the X Y axis Point Style 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help This setting provides two options for displaying points in 3D Viewer Basic and Advanced If the Basic option is selected 3D Viewer will render the point shapes in the 3D Viewer On some computers this option may hinder the performance of the 3D Viewer If the Advanced option is selected 3D Viewer will use bitmap images to display the points If you are experiencing performance issues display points in 3D Viewer the Advanced option should be selec
109. ator Desktop VMOL Settings 2 3 2012 4 10 PM Time Step Solvers Recharge and EVT This chapter will cover the following topics MODFLOW Translation Settings f78 e Generallzzal e Time Steps leo e Solvers ksi e Recharge and Evapotranspirationbe3 e Layer Types lod e Cell Rewettingbsal e Initial Heads bot e Anisotropylso2 e Output Controllsoa 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 278 MODPATH Translation Settings bo 10 10 1 MODFLOW This chapter describes the features functionality and options in the Translation section of the VMOD Flex interface The Translation section is where the MODFLOW packages are generated Depending on the numeric engine selected for running the flow simulation the MODFLOW tree item may appear as MODFLOW 2000 MODFLOW 2005 or MODFLOW LGR 10 10 1 1 General Here you can see the output directory where the translated files will be generated You can also specify the start date Translate __ Translate General 4 General Settings Run Run MODFLOW 2005 Output Folde C Users Ad Settings Start Date 10 5 2005 Time Steps Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format z 5 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 279 VMOD Flex Help 10 10 1 2 MODFLOW Settings Specify the property package LPF or BCF Run Type
110. aves the drawdown in the listing file e F Term Saves the flux terms cell by cell flow terms in the listing file e Budget Saves the budget information in the listing file Note MODFLOW only allows the flow terms F Term to be stored once in either the binary budget file BGT or the listing file LST Be aware that this setting can be lost if MODFLOW is being run together with MODPATH because MODPATH requires the flow terms to be written to the BGT file and not to the LST file The checkbox labeled Save FLO file will save the cell by cell flow terms required by MT3D when MT3D is not being run at the same time as MODFLOW Saving Output Every Nth Time Step For simulations with many stress periods and time steps it can be very tedious to manually select the desired output time step intervals The row of fields underneath the Output Control 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow so table are used to specify regular time step intervals for saving files during Each N th step in each stress period The first text box is where the N value is entered To apply this value to the column click the underlying checkbox If MODPATH is run with the MODFLOW simulation Visual MODFLOW will save the flow terms for all time steps 10 10 2 MODPATH The MODPATH program is used for calculating the advective flow pathlines for forward tracking and backward tracking particles MODPATH has the following run time
111. ayers Rewetting Initial Heads 4 Anisotropy Output Control 5 MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Solution for lake stages THETA THETA Explicit THETA 0 0 semiimplicit 0 0 lt THETA lt 1 0 or implicit THETA 1 0 solution for lake stages Specify several values that assist in the LAK package convergence 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 296 10 10 1 7 Layer Types The Layer Type Settings window is used to set the LAYCON value and the LAYAVG variables required by the MODFLOW numeric engine The LAYCON value is the layer type index array recognized by MODFLOW MODFLOW has four different Layer Types to choose for LAYCON values as described below e Type 0 Confined Transmissivity and storage coefficients of the layer are constant for the entire simulation e Type 1 Unconfined Transmissivity of the layer varies and is calculated from the saturated thickness and hydraulic conductivity The storage coefficient is constant valid only for Layer 1 e Type 2 Confined Unconfined Transmissivity of the layer is constant The storage coefficient may alternate between confined and unconfined values e Type 3 Confined Unconfined Default setting Transmissivity of the layer varies It is 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 297 VMOD Flex Help calculated from the saturated thickness and hydraulic conductivity The storage coefficie
112. bsolute Preview newdate stage 11 01 2005 16 78 11 02 2005 16 81 11 03 2005 16 85 11 04 2005 16 9 1105 2005 16 94 11 06 2005 16 94 11 07 2005 16 9 11 08 2005 16 84 11 09 2005 16 78 11 10 2005 16 82 lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help If the time values are expressed in relative time select the Relative option and specify the starting date and time from the combo boxes If the time values are expressed in absolute time select the Absolute option Click the Next button to continue The next step involves data mapping and creating attributes The required target fields will vary depending on which option was selected in the previous step e g Absolute or Relative 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 110 aol x Data Mapping Target_ fields Map_to Unit category Unit Multiplier Data type a Relative time newdate wi Length m 1 Numeric x Source Data Preview newdate stage E 11201 2005 16 78 1102 2005 16 81 11 03 2005 16 85 11 04 2005 16 9 11 05 2005 16 94 11 06 2005 16 94 2 11207 72NNF lica Aa T b lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help If you selected Absolute the required target field will be Start Date and Time and if you selected Relative the required target field will be Relative Time Map the time field in your source data to the required target field Next create a new att
113. bute field e Repeat for other attributes that have been assigned this method e Click the OK button Use Shapefile Attribute From Shapefile The method allows you to use Shapefile attributes for defining boundary condition attributes e Select the Use Shapefile method from the combo box e Click the Use Shapefile button to launch the Shapefile dialog 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow zo e The combo box contains all the attributes of the specified polygon used to define the horizontal geometry of the boundary condition e Select the desired attribute from the combo box and then click the OK button to close the dialog box From 3D Gridded Data From 3D Gridded Data This method allows you to use spatially variable attributes from a 3D Gridded data object for defining a boundary condition attribute When this method is selected the Use 3D Gridded Data button will become active When selected the 3D Gridded Data dialog will launch e From the Data Explorer select the desired 3D Gridded data object e Click the button to insert it into the Select 3D Gridded Data Object field e Once selected the data object s attributes are listed in the combo box below e Select the desired attribute from the combo box and then click the OK button to close the dialog box Note The specified 3D Gridded data object must horizontally and vertically overlap the defined property zone ge
114. by entering the well name in the text box located at the top of the window and then clicking the Find button The Data to Display list box allows you to select which tables to display For example if Screens is selected default the Screens and Pumping Schedule tables will be shown If Observations is selected the Observation Points and Observation Data tables are shown If Well Tops is selected the Well Tops table will be shown The Display Format frame allows you express the Z values in the data tables as either an Elevation or a Measured Depth with respect to the well head Zmax At the top of each table there is a set of buttons that allow you to add remove and modify the contents These buttons are described below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 136 Add a row to the table Insert a row above the active row Insert a row below the active row Remove the active row from the table Adding Well Head Data To add an item to the Well Head table follow the steps below e Click the Add Row button from the Well Head toolbar to add a new item to the table e Enter an alphanumeric name in the Well Name column Note The well name must be unique and it may contain hyphens and spaces but not the forward or backward slash characters e Enter the X Y coordinates of the well head in the X and Y fields respectively e Enter the elevation of the well head in the Zmax field e Enter the dept
115. cal Exponential Gaussian Power and the Hoe effect models If the variogram information is not available the default linear variogram with no nugget effect should be used This option is a special case of the Power model with the exponent equal to 1 Natural Neighbors The Natural Neighbor method Watson 1994 is based on the Thiessen polygon method used for interpolating rainfall data The grid node for interpolation is considered a new point or target to the existing data set With the addition of this point the Thiessen polygons based on the existing points are modified to include the new point The polygons reduce in area to include the new points and the area that is taken out from the existing polygons is called the borrowed area The interpolation algorithm calculates the interpolated value as the weighted average of the neighboring observations where the weights are proportional to the borrowed areas The Natural Neighbor method is valid only with the convex hull of the Thiessen polygon formed by the data points and values outside the hull extrapolation should be used with caution The Natural Neighbor interpolation scheme may be visualized as a taut rubber sheet stretched to satisfy all the data points The interpolated value at any location is a linear combination of all Natural Neighbors of that location and the resulting surface is continuous with a slope that is also continuous Combining the gradients or slopes with the li
116. cal data is expressed as a depth e g distance from ground to the bottom of the well then select Measured Depth Select the type of vertical well data to import horizontal wells not supported Select the Well Heads Only option to import just the well heads i e X Y coordinates elevation and well depth for each well Select the Well Heads with the Following Data option to import additional data for each well Options include 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help Screen ID Location Import the screen locations for each well Select the Pumping Schedule check box to also import related pumping schedules for each screen This data could be used later to define pumping well boundary conditions Observation Points Import observation points for each well Select either Observed heads Observed Concentrations or both Well tops Import the elevation or measured depth of points along the well path where formation tops horizons intersect with the well This data could be used later to generate surface and horizon layers Well Paths Please see Well Heads with Well PathI9i section Note For data requirements for each option please see the next step Data Mapping Once you have selected which well data to import click the Next button to proceed to the data mapping This step requires you to map the columns in the source data to the required target fields The required fields will vary depending on the t
117. cal o CN Head C Head observation date i None None None Nore e OE Date xl M Source Data Preview Well Name lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help When this option is selected you must first map the well heads under the Well Heads tab described above Next click the Observation Points tab and map the appropriate columns from the source data to the following target fields For Observed Heads e Logger ID e Elevation e Observed Head e Head Observation Date For Observed Concentrations e Logger ID e Elevation e Chemical e Observed Concentration e Concentration Observation Date 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 2 VMOD Flex Help Well Heads with Well Tops Data Import name _ elevation bottom toe sole sssziasescccsss aeraozassescese coor eas fais at Conse evel sasaracesscccss eraocasesssese E E E Mech Sad 536212 689999999 4814029 99999898 GB 01 323 5 213 5 271 5 Gravel zi EE as When this option is selected you must first map the well heads under the Well Heads tab described above Next click on the Tops tab and map the appropriate columns from the source data to the following target fields Top Z elevation or measured depth of formation Top ID formation name e g Sand1 Sand2 Clay etc Please note the well top data in the source file must be formatted as follows well ID Top ID To
118. can be accessed by clicking on the Operations tree node in the Settings window To access the Settings window in the Data Explorer right click on the data object and select Settings from the pop up menu HE FormSettings General g Operations Arithmetic General Style ioj x Operations Select Operation z Constant x Description and Instructions For all Z values in the object apply Z Constant Assign the values from Constant nput Parameters __ Parameter Value I Save As New Data Object Execute VMOD Flex supports the following data operations e Arithmetic Operations Polygons Polylines Points and Maps only e Attribute Operations Surface Points Time Schedules only 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 142 e Converting Model Layers to Points Data Object Cross Sections only e Converting Well Tops to Points Data Object Wells only e Calculating Well Head Elevation Z from a Surface Wells only Each type of operation is described in detail in the following sections Arithmetic Operations Arithmetic operations allow you to shift the elevation values in the data object source data according to a user specified arithmetic expression For example you can use this option to drape a map over a specified surface data object You can also shift polylines polygons points up or down by a specified constant value Arithmetic operations can be applied t
119. category Unit Multiplier Data type ba Create a new attribute WIDTH i Length m 1 Numeric XI M Source Data Preview ID EDMARK_O WIDTH TYPE 1 1 River 2 2 River 3 3 River 4 4 River 5 5 River 6 6 River 9 l River a il lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help This dialog allows you to import shapefile attributes To create a new attribute click the Add a new attribute button When selected a new row will be added to the Data Mapping table In the Map_to column select the desired attribute field in the source data from the combo box Repeat for additional attributes You can delete a mapped attribute by selecting the row from the Data Mapping table and then clicking the Delete button For a description of the Unit Category Unit Multiplier and Data Type columns please refer to section Data Mappingl77 section Click the Next button to continue The final step involves validation of the data being imported This step will ensure that the data set contains valid data for each of the mapped columns For SHP files please refer to Data Validation 7s section for more information on the data validation step For DXF files the following dialog will show indicating the number of polylines that will be created from the source file 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data e ini xi Number of DXF entities processed 1 Number of Polylines created 2 lt Bac
120. ce Georef Tag File BMP BPW TIF TFW JPG JPW lf your source file has a georeferencing tag file you can skip to the final step If the source file does not have a georeferencing tag file you will be prompted to manually georeference the raster image This procedure is described in the following section Georeferencing Images Georeferencing a graphics file involves mapping a coordinate system to the individual pixels of the image When this is required the following window will display when importing a raster image 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services w VMOD Flex Help Control Points Y 4862795 4863928 f X V Show Output Region I Show Graticule J No Rotation Georeference Information Value Q VM5 6 Te 1453 1133 Projected lt lt Previous Nert Cancel L H Toolbar Buttons The buttons in the top toolbar are described below e Save Saves the transformed image along with a corresponding georeferencing tag file e Zoom In Click and drag the mouse to select the zoom area e Zoom Out Zoom out of the image e Full Extent Zoom completely out so that the entire image is shown e Pan When zoomed in move the image left right up or down e Add Control Point Add a georeference point See Adding Georeference Points e Delete Control Point Delete a selected georeference point e Transform Image Assigns coordinates to image pixels using the specified control points
121. ce sink from the model grid The default formula used to calculate the Leakance value for the General Head boundary is COND SKAVG x FACEAREA x UCTOCOND cai DIST 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 222 where e COND is the Leakance for each General Head grid cell e KAVG is the Average Conductivity e FACEAREA is the surface area of the selected grid cell Face for each General Head grid cell automatically calculated during translation e UCTOCOND is the conversion factor for converting the K value to the same Length L and Time T units used by COND e DIST is the Boundary Distance the distance from the external source to the assigned general head boundary If the Use default conductance formula option is not selected the fields used for calculating the General Head Conductance value Distance to Reservoir Average Conductivity are removed from the table and the Leakance field becomes a writable field where a value may be entered Supported Geometry The geometry for General Head boundary conditions can be specified using a polygon data objects Drain For finite difference models VMOD Flex supports the standard Drain Boundary Package included with MODFLOW The MODFLOW input data for Drain grid cells is stored in the projectname DRN file Currently for finite element model translation this boundary condition is not supported MODFLOW s Drain Package is designed to sim
122. ces Working with Your Data s which row to import from using the From Row text field e VMOD Flex provides you with various options for importing wells and associated well data For example you can choose to import well heads Well ID X Y Elevation Bottom or you can choose to import wells heads along with related screen locations pumping schedules or observation points ini xi m Select the type of wells to import Vettical C Deviated Horizontal r Select the format of the vertical data in your data source Elevation Measured depths m Select the type of data you want to import Well heads only IDX Elevation not required Well heads wiht the following data C Screens ID locatior ial Pumping schedule Observation poini I Gbseryedihead I Observed concentration lt Back Next gt gt Cancel In the Select the type of wells to import frame choose between Vertical and Deviated Horizontal Note For Deviated Horizontal Wells only well heads and well paths can be imported via the import process Wells screens observation points and well tops for horizontal wells can be defined later in the Wells table For more information on the well table please see Well Tableha4 Next specify how the vertical data is expressed in the source file If the data is expressed with respect to a vertical reference datum e g above mean sea level then select Elevation If the verti
123. cified The Anisotropy by layer option uses the anisotropy ratio Ky Kx Ratio specified for each layer of the model as shown in the figure and the Kx values specified in each grid cell to calculate the Kx or Ky values for each grid cell Selecting Anisotropy by layer will not replace the original modeled values for Ky but will instead calculate values during the translation of Visual MODFLOW file formats to MODFLOW input data file formats to be used for the run By default each new simulation will be set to use the Anisotropy by layer option The Anisotropy as specified option will use the Kx and Ky values defined for each property zone This feature allows spatially variable anisotropy within a layer as opposed to the Anisotropy by layer option which applies a single anisotropy ratio Ky Kx Factor for the entire layer A more in depth discussion of spatially variable anisotropy can be found in Kladias 1997 Note MODFLOW 2000 does not support running the BCF package with Anisotropy as Specified Translate 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow sos 10 10 1 110utput Control The Output Control run options set the information and frequency of information written and saved to the various MODFLOW output files see following figure Translate Translate General Settings Save to Binary Print to LST MODFLOW 2005 Settings Each Nth steps Time Steps aaa
124. d color of the graticule Major mark width Set the width of the major mark ticks Minor tick distance Set the distance between minor ticks Auto Interval Automatically calculates the distance between graticule lines Interval If Auto Interval is not selected set the distance between graticule lines Mark Settings Controls the axis labels For each axis you can set the visible status rotate the label and control the gap between the label and the axis itself The final step involves previewing the raster image and viewing coordinate information before importing into VMOD Flex Data Import Map coordinates Top right x 575606 106278753 Y 4863929 99300153 Bottom left x 1574143 944498471 Y 4862790 07073205 Georeferenced image JEASampleFiles test_project baseline_sup Georeference parameter JEASampleFiles test_project baseline_sup The Map Coordinates frame provides the georeferenced coordinates of the Top Right and Bottom Left corners of the image The path of the georeferenced image and the associated georeference tag file is also shown Click the Finish button to import the map into VMOD Flex 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 108 4 1 9 Time Schedules Time schedule data generally contains time data for one or more attributes It can be used in VMOD Flex to define the stress periods for transient boundary condition attributes e g recharge river stage etc The follo
125. d from horizons 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 196 Define Property Zones Create New Property Zone Method Select one or more structural zones Property Zones ore oe Structural Zones Use Polygon Data Object Name Description Save Property Values Group of parameters to define Click on the Use Structural Zone button as shown above e Select a zone from the conceptual model tree under the Zones node and then click the gt button to insert the zone in the Structural Zones field e Click the Add button to add and combine structural zones e Proceed to Defining Property Zoneshs71 Using Polygon Data Object This method allows you to define a property zone using both a structural zone and a polygon data object The polygon data object is used to define the horizontal extent of the property zone and therefore must be fully contained within the conceptual model boundary The structural zone is used to define the volume i e the vertical extent of the property zone 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 197 VMOD Flex Help Conceptual Model Define Modeling Objectives Srp Mpa Collect Data Objects Define Conceptual Model Name Define Horizontal Extent Property Zones Define Model Structure Property Zone 2 Prope Zone 1 J Define Property Zones Description Select Polygon Data perty S E Select the Next Step gt boundary I D
126. d table and a Screen from the Screen Table if multiple screens exist e Click the Add Row button from the Pumping Schedule toolbar to add a new item to the table e Enter a Start time value and press the lt Tab gt key to advance to the End time field e Enter an End time value and press the lt Tab gt key to advance to the Rate field e Enter a pumping Rate value remember to use a negative value for extraction wells e Press the lt Tab gt key again to create a new schedule item e The final time in the pumping schedule should have a pumping rate of 0 to indicate the stop time Note If the pumping schedule is not specified for the entire length of the transient simulation then it will assume the well is shut off for the time where no information is available For 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 138 steady state simulation the pumping rate for the first time period will be used as the steady state pumping rate Adding Observation Points Observation Points are the elevations at which head or concentration observations are recorded Although most monitoring or observation wells are installed with a well screen spanning a known interval of the aquifer VMOD Flex requires a single observation point elevation to be defined instead of a well screen interval To add an observation point for a well e Select the Observations option from the Data to Display box This will show the Observation Points table
127. dd rows columns within a specified interval where coarsening in an interval will remove rows columns in a specified interval In the Settings frame define the row column interval for which the refinement coarsening should be applied by specifying the Start row column and the End row column For example if you would like to refine the grid area between row 20 and 30 you would enter 20 as the start row and 30 as the end row Finally specify the refinement coarsening factor in the Refine by box For example if refine in an interval is selected a factor of 2 would subdivide each row column within the specified 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 237 VMOD Flex Help interval into two equally spaced rows columns If coarsen in an interval is selected a factor of 2 would reduce the number of rows columns within the specified interval by a factor of 2 Click the Apply button to show the defined refinement coarsening in the adjacent 2D Viewer 8 1 2 Define Child Grid for LGR A higher resolution block shaped child grid can be created within any numerical grid parent grid and used for running Local Grid Refinement LGR simulations with the MODFLOW 2005 LGR package Refined child grids are often used to improve simulation accuracy around areas of interest within your simulation domain For example refined grids may be needed in e regions where hydraulic gradients change substantially over short distances as would be common near
128. dle of a stack of horizons It can never be the highest or lowest horizon Horizons above it up to the next discontinuity or erosional horizon will lap onto it while all horizons below it will be truncated by it These horizons can be thought of as the top or base of a sequence Conformable default horizons will be truncated by erosional base and discontinuous horizons Lower conformable horizons will be truncated by upper conformable horizons f a conformable horizon is above an erosional horizon the conformable horizon will conform to the erosional horizon it will be pushed up by the erosional horizon The horizon rules described above are applied after all the horizons are calculated If one of the horizons will be truncated by an erosional base or discontinuity horizon it is a good idea to extend the input data beyond these unconformable horizons in order to truncate them properly Demonstration of Horizon Types The image below shows three surfaces in a 3D Viewer The surfaces are colored Red Green Blue from top to bottom respectively 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 190 You will see that there are spots where the green surface intersects with the red surfaces and likewise where the blue surface intersects with the green surface For numerical models FEFLOW and MODFLOW this geometry is not permitted which is why surfaces are converted to horizons Assigning a horizon type wi
129. ds If your time units are not second you should multiply the default value by the number of seconds in your time unit e g use a residual criterion of 0 01 86400 if your time unit is days e Damping Factor Default 1 This factor allows the user to reduce dampen the head change calculated during each successive outer iteration For most well posed and physically realistic groundwater flow problems the damping factor of one will be appropriate This parameter can be used to make a non convergent oscillating or divergent solution process more stable such that a solution will be achieved This is done by decreasing the damping factor to a value between 0 and 1 only rarely lt 0 6 This parameter is similar to the acceleration parameters used in other solvers e Printout Interval Default 10 The printout interval is the number of iterations after which the maximum head change and residual of the solution is written to the listing LST file e f the Preconditioning Method is set to Cholesky the Relaxation parameter can be set Although the default is 1 in some cases a value of 0 97 0 99 may reduce the number of iterations required for convergence 10 10 1 4 2 GMG The GMG solver based on the preconditioned conjugate gradient algorithm has been developed by the USGS for solving finite difference based flow models As opposed to AMG the preconditioning in GMG is based on a solver method known as geometric multigrid The
130. e extinction depth or is beneath layer 1 evapotranspiration from the water table is negligible Between these limits evapotranspiration from the water table varies linearly with water table elevation Supported Geometry The geometry for Evapotranspiration boundary conditions can be specified using polygon data objects Lake For finite difference models VMOD Flex supports the Lake LAK3 package for MODFLOW After translation the Lake input data for MODFLOW is stored in the projectname LAK file Currently translation of this boundary condition is not supported for finite element models The lake boundary condition can be used to simulate the effects of stationary surface water bodies such as lakes and reservoirs on an aquifer The lake boundary is an alternative to the traditional approach of using the general head boundary condition The main difference in the lake boundary is that the lake stage is calculated automatically based on the water budget which is a function of inflow outflow recharge etc For more information on the Lake package please refer to USGS publication Documentation of a Computer Program to Simulate Lake Aquifer Interaction Using the MODFLOW Ground Water Flow Model and the MOC3D Solute Transport Model Required Data The lake package requires the following input parameters e Stage The initial stage of the lake at the beginning of the run e Bottom The elevation of the bottom of the seepage layer
131. e allowing you to add move or delete the vertices When the Selector combo box is set to Points the following icons are added to the 2D Viewer sidebar Add Vertex Add a vertex to a polyline or polygon feature by placing your mouse in the desired location on the line or polygon boundary and clicking the left mouse button aN Move Vertex Select and hold the left mouse button and move the vertex to a new location the line or polygon boundary amp Delete Vertex When selected select a vertex to remove from a line and or polygon boundary Once you have created modified the data object geometry using the edit tools described above click the 8 End Edit button to save the changes Finally click the View button to return to the normal 2D Viewing mode 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 121 VMOD Flex Help 4 5 Deleting Data Objects To delete a data object right click on the data object from the Data Explorer and select Delete from the pop up menu 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Visualizing Data in 2D 3D 122 5 Visualizing Data in 2D 3D Visualizing Data Objects VMOD Flex supports two types of interactive data viewers 3D Viewer and 2D Viewer The 3D Viewer is based on OpenGL graphics technology allowing you to visualize graphically rich three dimensional representations of your data The 2D Viewer allows you to view your data from a planar perspective and provides various tools for editing and drawing data
132. e corresponding to the potential time frame of interest If a steady state simulation is run using a model containing transient boundary condition data only the data from the first Time Period of each grid cell will be used for the steady state conditions If a transient model is run for 10 years and a boundary condition is defined only for a period up to 7 years Visual MODFLOW will assume this boundary condition does not exist for the remaining 3 years of the simulation The exception to this rule are the Constant Head and Constant Concentration Boundaries which must be defined for the entire simulation Note For a steady state simulation a minimum of one active grid cell in the model MUST contain a head dependent boundary condition type Otherwise the model is indeterminate and the solution will not converge This head dependent boundary condition acts as a reference head for all calculations The head dependent boundary condition type can be one of the following Constant Head CHD River RIV Stream STR General Head GHB Lake LAK For a transient simulation the specified initial heads are sufficient for a determinant solution 10 6 Define Observations Observation wells can be added to the numerical model as follows 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 275 VMOD Flex Help First import the observation well data as described in the Import Wells s9 section The observation well data
133. e conceptual model Each property zone is assigned appropriate property attributes e g conductivity storage and initial heads A groundwater flow model requires many different types of data to simulate the hydrogeological processes influencing the flow of groundwater In VMOD Flex the hydrogeological characteristics of the model are classified into the following parameter groups 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 194 e Conductivity Kx Ky Kz e Storage Ss Sy Peff Ptot e Initial Heads By default VMOD Flex automatically assigns the entire model domain the default property parameter values specified in the Project Settings see Project Settings for more details However in most situations the flow properties will not be uniform throughout the entire model domain and it will be necessary to assign different property values to different areas of the conceptual model This can be accomplished by creating Property Zones In VMOD Flex a property zone is a specified 3D volume generated from structural zones with user defined hydrogeologic attributes Property zone geometry can be defined using one or more existing structural zones As such property zones can only be generated after horizons have been defined in the conceptual model Please see Defining the Structurelte4l for more details VMOD Flex supports various methods for assigning values to hydrogeologic parameters The method used
134. e effects of plant transpiration direct evaporation and seepage at the ground surface by removing water from the saturated groundwater regime The evapotranspiration boundary approach is based on the following assumptions e When the water table is at or above the ground surface top of layer 1 evapotranspiration loss from the water table occurs at the maximum rate specified by the user e When the elevation of the water table is below the extinction depth or is beneath layer 1 evapotranspiration from the water table is negligible Between these limits evapotranspiration from the water table varies linearly with water table elevation Required Data The Evapotranspiration Package requires the following information 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 225 VMOD Flex Help e Evapotranspiration rate The rate of evapotranspiration as it occurs when the water table elevation is equal to the top of the grid cell elevation This value should be entered in the units set for recharge as defined in the Project Settings e Extinction Depth The depth below the top of grid cell elevation where the evapotranspiration rate is negligible The Evapotranspiration Package approach is based on the following assumptions When the water table is at or above the ground surface top of layer 1 evapotranspiration loss from the water table occurs at the maximum rate specified by the user When the elevation of the water table is below th
135. e virtual grid W Slice Colormap Slice Settings Colormap AutoApply Sice Type Colors Row E Isolines lsosurfaces Row Number 1 75 1 gt U Fill Settings Transparency 0 3 E Show Legend ay J ox Settings for the Colormap are identical to those explained above for Slice Plot Color Map on Cross Sections Color map has an additional Slice Type which is Cross Section which is shown below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 171 VMOD Flex Help E Settings boba General General Style Cells Vertices i 3 Lines V Show Colormap V Use virtual grid Slice Colormap Slice Settings Colormap General Slice Type Colors CrossSection Isolines lsosurfaces Cross Section gt Polyline1 After selecting this Slice Type you need to provide a polyline data object that contains one or more polylines representing the cross sections you want to render Polylines can be imported from a shapefile or DXF file or created manually See Creating New Data Objects h13 for more details Select this polyline data object from the tree then click on the gt to insert this into the field as shown above Click Apply and the display will update with the appropriate cross section lines An example for two cross sections is shown below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 172 amp 3D Viewer 1 S e RIONE Objec
136. ead due to aquifer compaction and water expansion Using Specific Storage Visual MODFLOW determines the primary storage coefficient sf1 for MODFLOW The primary storage coefficient is calculated by Visual MODFLOW to be equal to the specific storage multiplied by the layer thickness Specific Storage x thickness Storage coefficient Please NOTE that Specific Storage is not used in Steady State simulations Specific Yield Sy is known as the storage term for an unconfined aquifer It is defined as the volume of water that an unconfined aquifer releases from storage per unit surface area per unit decline in the water table For sand and gravel aquifers specific yield is generally equal to the porosity MODFLOW uses Ss or Sy depending on the layer type assigned by the user please refer to Layer Type Settings lz98 For an unconfined layer MODFLOW uses Sy to determine storage volumes For a confined layer Ss is used For a variable layer MODFLOW will check the head value of the cell to determine if it is confined or not SWS recommends that if you do not have measured parameter values for Ss and Sy that you refer to literature values as a default Effective Porosity Eff Por is the pore space through which flow actually occurs and is used by MODPATH to determine the average linear groundwater velocities for use in time dependent capture zones and time markers along pathlines This term is not used for MODFLOW simulations Total Porosity
137. eases you will be able to define new particle locations Select Engines Select the Engines you wish to include in the model run r a NumericalGrid1 Numerical Model Description USGS MODFLOW 2000 from SWS q G G 8 a Run Numerical Engines amp View Results Only one version of MODFLOW may be selected for a particular run You can also include ZoneBudget and MODPATH Currently these options are only appropriate if you have imported a Visual MODFLOW project with zone budget zones defined and particles MODFLOW LGR should only be run when you have defined a child grid and ran Conceptual to Numerical Conversion from the Conceptual Modeling workflow 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 277 VMOD Flex Help When you are finished click Next Step button to proceed 10 10 Translation Settings The Translate button will translate the model input data from VMOD Flex file formats to the data files required for the selected numeric engines see Appendix A S E Define Modeling Objectives S E Define Numerical Model Translate Ej Define Boundary Conditions ma S E Select the Next Step I Define Observation Zones li Define Observation Wells ll Define Zone Budget Zones li Define Particles 3 J Select Run Type I PEST Fun Single Run EJ Translate Run Numerical Engines H View Results Settings E MODFLOW 2005 r Jsers Administr
138. ed with each layer of the model The available LAYAVG settings can be chosen from a picklist by clicking the down arrow key or you can scroll through the options by clicking the spin buttons on the left as shown in the following figure The Layer type column displays the Layer Type associated with each layer of the model The available layer types can be chosen from a picklist by clicking the down arrow on the right or you can scroll through the options by clicking the spin buttons on the left 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 298 10 10 1 8 Cell Rewetting Translate Translate General 4 Settings MODFLOW 2005 Settings Time Steps Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Wetting General Cell wetting IWDFLG Wetting method WETDRY flag Wetting threshold WETDRY value iteration interval for attempting to wet cells IWETIT Wetting head IHDWET Wetting factor WETFCT Head value in dry cells Inactive From below WETDRY lt 0 0 1 1 Calculated from neighbours IHDWET 0 1 1e30 Layers Keep min saturated thickness for bottom layer False Rewetting Min Saturated thickness for bottom layer 0 Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control 5 MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Cell wetting IWDFLG Activate cell wetting The original USGS MODFLOW did not allow cells in unconfined layers to become re saturated if the head dropped below the bottom eleva
139. efine Boundary Conditions I Define Surface Water Ne Create New Property Zone Method Define Volume I Define Pumping Wells Define Boundary Conditic l Use Structural Zone s Select the structural zone EJ Select Grid Type 4 Zone2 WW View Finite Element Mesh Use Polygon Data Object J View Finite Difference Grid Te Convert to MODFLOW Model Property Values Group of parameters to define Save Conductivity Kx Ky Kz lt Prem Parameter Unit Method Value Object Mapping m s Constant x 0 0001 7 KY m s Constant x 0 0001 KZ m s Constant gt 1E 05 Just in time help for this step is unavailable e Select a polygon data object from the Data Explorer and click the button to insert the data object in the Select Polygon Data field e Note The selected polygon cannot contain multiple parts overlapping shapes or holes These features are currently not supported for property zone creation If your polygon does not meet this criteria it can be edited using the 2D Viewer editing tools For more information on this topic please see Creating New Data Objects hal e Next select a structural zone from the Conceptual Model tree and click the 3 button to insert the data object in the Define Volume frame Assigning Property Parameters Once the geometry has been defined you can assign parameter values to the property zone e Select the group of paramet
140. efinement is to be performed In the adjacent field under the Number of Elements column enter the desired number of element that should exist in polygon area VMOD Flex will automatically refine the underlying triangles to equal the prescribed number of elements for the polygon area Once you have defined the refinement for the polygon features click the OK button to apply the settings Generating the Horizontal Mesh 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 245 VMOD Flex Help Once the above settings have been defined click the Generate button to generate the horizontal mesh Once generated the Triangle output results e g number of mesh vertices triangles edges etc are displayed in the text box above the Generate button These results may be copied to the clipboard by right clicking anywhere inside the box and selecting Copy to Clipboard from the pop up menu Polygons Refinement Mesh vertices 1047 Mesh triangles 1813 Mesh edges 2859 Mesh exterior boundary edges 279 x Generate The generated mesh will also display in the adjacent 2D Viewer window If you are not satisfied with the mesh you can modify the settings and regenerate the mesh by selecting the Generate button again If you have selected polygon refinement the mesh may look something similar to below e Define Finite Element Mesh Name Generate Finite Bement Mesh Delaunay Triangulation Method L switch
141. egend ke eree Color Zones O Pow M Conductivity 2 Storage initial Heads E Boundary Conditions Recharge Evapotranspiration Constant Heads Constant Head 1 Rivers River 0 River 1 Pumping Wells Pumping Wells Boundary Cond Zone Budget O Particles Forward Particles Backward Particles Flow Observation Wells E Outputs Layer 1 Row 64 Column 63 X 1181 88 Y 8 62 Zones 1 t m L DRUMCO grid Run e Under the Toolbox use the combo box to select from the various Property Groups Conductivity Initial Heads and Storativity e For each parameter group you can choose to render by Zones or by a selected attribute Based on your selection the color rendering in the views will change e Click Database button to see the conductivity zones that exist in your model e Use the same tools as described in the previous step to manipulate the views e The display tools will allow you to switch from discrete cells rendering to color shading contours ma H Render as cells Show color shading I Show hide contour lines Hl Show hide grid lines e At the bottom of the display you will see in the status bar the position of your mouse cursor in the current view XY grid position Layer Row Column and the Zone ID or attribute value for the selected cell 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 265 VMOD Flex Help The different property zones are assigned and modified in VMOD Flex using an assortment of graphical tools a
142. el Help Show Slice will control the display status in the 3D Viewer Use Virtual Grid option allows you to use a coarsened version of the true 3d grid dimensions This option is recommended when you have moderate to large size grids exceeding a few hundred thousand cells If you have a small grid then this option can be turned off For more details see Virtual Grid Settings h4 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 16 VMOD Flex Help Under Slice Settings specify the desired Layer Row or Column Number Under Fill Settings the ByAttribute option is default and recommended for most cases Show Legend check box at the bottom of the window will add a color legend to the current 3d view Show Wireframe will render with wireframe instead of filled in cells The example below illustrates this Filled Slice Wireframe In the Settings tree under Slice Colors you can access the color page where you can choose which attribute you want to render in the case of Properties or Recharge and Evapotranspiration you can render by Zone or by the specified Attribute eg Kx Recharge rate aoe more information on the color by attribute feature please refer to Color By Attributel150 section Colormap 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings B Settings E General General E Style p 6 Cells E Vertices li E Show Colormap V Us
143. el follow the steps below B H O a E AIRPORT TRANSIENT grid g E 1 Open Related Workflow s Clone Settings Delete Expand to selection Expand all child nodes Collapse all After this the model tree will be duplicated and added under the selected numerical grid a new Numerical Model workflow will then load where you can work with this model run clone 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 320 5 E Model Domain ee Boundary Conditions L E ARPORT TF ae e Run Original GL input Model Run 6 C Properties E C Boundary Conditions Properties Boundary Conditions Outputs a e The Workflow and Model Explorer are closely associated as you progress through a specific numerical model workflow the items you see in the Flex Viewer originate from the corresponding Run folder on the Model Explorer For example if you are working a clone of a model run eg Run2 and you are viewing boundary condition cells you will see these originate from the After this the model tree will be duplicated and added under the selected numerical grid a new Numerical Model workflow will then load where you can work with this model run clone 10 14 Export VMOD Flex allows you to export some raw data and most of the numerical model i
144. eling Workflow 224 with MODFLOW The Recharge input data for MODFLOW is stored in the projectname RCH file For finite element models recharge boundary conditions are translated as the In Out flow material parameter The recharge boundary condition is typically used to simulate surficially distributed recharge to the groundwater system Most commonly recharge occurs as a result of precipitation percolating into the groundwater system However the recharge boundary can potentially be used to simulate recharge from sources other than precipitation such as irrigation artificial recharge or seepage from a pond Note The recharge rate is a parameter that is not often measured at a site but rather it is assumed to be a percentage of the precipitation This percentage typically ranges from 5 to 20 depending on many different factors including e the predominant land use and vegetation type e the surface topography slope and e the soil cover material Supported Geometry The geometry for Recharge boundary conditions can be specified using polygon data objects Evapotranspiration For finite difference models VMOD Flex supports the Evapotranspiration Package ET included with MODFLOW After translation the Evapotranspiration input data for MODFLOW is stored in the projectname EVT file Currently this boundary condition is not supported for finite element translation The evapotranspiration boundary condition simulates th
145. ell 4 and 6 in the following figure As a result the parameter value calculated for grid cell 6 will over write the parameter value calculated for grid cell 4 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 212 7 6 2 Define Pumping Wells At this step define well boundary condition 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 213 VMOD Flex Help Visual MODFLO drumex ual Model a a EN CSa ag Fie Tools Window Help Workflow TAR D H Data E E Data o amp drumco Bevation 1 J dumco Elevation 2 amp drumco Bevation 3 amp dumco Bevation 4 Eg drumco Bevation 5 Ee dumco Bevation 6 A VMod Imported Wells IO Polygon Define Modeling Objectives Collect Data Objects Define Conceptual Model Define Model Structure Define Property Zones Select the Next Step 5 Define Boundary Conditions Define Surface Water Ne J E Define Boundary Conditi Define Well Boundary Condition Name Description Select Wells Data Object A 000 Model Explorer H Rive Pumping E Pum Particles Forward Backwa E Fow E Observa E Outputs Conceptual Model 2 E Model Boundary 2 Structure E Horizons Horizon1 Horizon2 Horizon3 Horizon4 Horizon5 E Horizon 5 E Zones E Zone1 E Zone2 E Zone3 E Zone4 E Zone5 a Pronerties lt m X lt im Quick Overview Instructi ons Pre requisit es Result
146. ent Mesh Add In Lines Points Polygons V Model Boundary v J Polygon1 J river2 T EERI Add In Lines Points Polygons Specify a unique name for the finite element mesh in the Name text field Defining the Superelement Mesh The Superelement Mesh represents the main geometry points and segments of the model region from which finite elements are generated A superelement mesh is defined using the model boundary polygon geometry and optionally one or more add ins Add ins are lines points or polygons within the model boundary which VMOD Flex uses as focal points to create nodes during finite element mesh creation By default the Add ins List contains the model boundary and any linear or point boundary condition currently defined for the conceptual model Additional add ins may be added to the list using data objects from the Data Explorer Note To avoid unstable mesh designs it is recommended that all add in objects are pre processed such that there is equal spacing between vertices on polygons and polylines Data object geometry can be edited using the 2D Viewer editing tools For more information please see Digitizing amp Editing Geometry in 2D Viewers 118I To add an add in using a data object from the Data Explorer e Leaving the Define Finite Element Mesh window open select the desired data object 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 242 from the Data
147. ent set of matrices in the outer iteration is not reached beforehand Twenty five inner iterations should be adequate for most problems However if the maximum number of inner iterations was used for all outer iterations and an appropriate mass balance error was not achieved this value can be increased e Head Change Criterion for Convergence Default 0 01 After every outer iteration is completed the solver checks for the maximum change in the solution at every cell If the maximum change in the solution is below a set convergence tolerance set here in the working units of feet or metres then the solution has converged and the solver stops otherwise a new outer iteration is started A solution accurate to 0 01 ft or m will normally be sufficient for most problems unless the maximum head change throughout the modeled domain is less than 1 foot or metre If an appropriate mass balance is not achieved and the number of inner and outer iterations is within the maximums this value can be decreased by an order of magnitude e Residual Criterion for Convergence Default 0 01 While the head change criterion is used to judge the overall solver convergence the residual criterion is used to judge the convergence of the inner iterations of the solver If the change in successive inner iterations is less than the tolerance specified here in working units of feet or metres then the solver will proceed with the next outer iteration The residual
148. eptual model inputs 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help 7 Wg NumericalGridi Numerical Model Converting conceptual model to numerical model i Conceptual model to numerical mode conversion has completed e Note that the new window is titled with the name of the new grid you provided ad NumericalGrid2 Numerical Model Convert conceptual model to nu Define Properties Define Boundary Conditions fl Select the Next Step Translate Run Numerical Engines View Results Converting conceptual model to numerical model Conceptual model to numerical model conversion has completed e This new window will appear in the active list at the bottom of the main parent window 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 52 3 M NumericalGrid2 S E Runt E Inputs E Properties i E Flow o Q 8 T T i C InitialHeads1 i Boundary Conditions i E Constant Heads i h C Constant Head 1 h C Constant Head 2 E Rivers i C River 1 E Ml Or tni te t w P Conceptual Model NumericalGridl Numerical Mod NumericalGrid2 Numerical Model e In addition this new model run will appear in the model tree The model run has a grid and corresponding inputs this can also be seen in the figure above e When the conversion is complete click Next Step to
149. er by creating cutaways To create a cutaway in a 3D Viewer follow the steps below Cutaway Properties I CutOffs Active m YZ Slice IV Active left x Position min max Fraction Pie 574695 6743 574366 6799 575150 osz MXZ Slice iv eo a Ae Y Position min Ymax Fraction F afte 14253008591 4862849 399 4863350 josz atter MY Slice I Active above ZPosition Zmin Zmax Fraction under 20 1484 10 22 77 foo2 so x e Right click anywhere inside the 3D Viewer and select CutAway Properties from the pop up menu The following dialog box will display on your screen e Click the CutOffs Active check box to enable CutAways e Under the Activity tab specify which slices to make active by clicking the appropriate Active check boxes The YZ slice refers to a vertical plane along the Y and Z axis the XZ slice refer to a vertical plane along the X and Z axis and the YZ slice refers toa horizontal plane along the Y and Z axis e For each active slice select which portion to remove from the viewer for example the portion of the model that is left or right side of the slice before or after the slice or above or under the slice 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 127 VMOD Flex Help e By default the position of each slice is automatically positioned in the middle of the data along its respective axis However you can manually change the position of the slice by entering a new value in the Posit
150. erical Model button Alternatively you can select the desired numerical grid from the Model Explorer tree right mouse click and select Convert to Numerical Model from the pop up menu Visual MODFLOW Flex Example Conceptual Model x ag File Tools Window Help Workflow 8x D a e O O l amp Data CE ground EJ Define Modeling Objectives CO layer2top Collect Data Objects Select Grid o8 layer2 bottom Define Conceptual Model NumericalGrid1 X OO boundary Define Model Structure OG chdeast Ej Define Property Zones OG chdwest EJ Select the Next Step OG rivers GBM Select Grid Type E View Finite Element Mesh g inite Difference Grid Convert To Numerical Model Explorer Conceptual Model 1 C Model Boundary 3 A Structure E Horizons Horizon1 Horizon2 Horizon3 3 Simulation Domain lJ Model Domain 5 Boundary Conditions Constant Head 1 0 Constant Head West M NumericalGrid1 a m i Conceptual Model 3D Viewer 1 After clicking on the conversion button a new numerical model workflow window will appear which includes the steps for the numerical model In the first window you will see the progress of the conceptual to numerical conversion This conversion could take several minutes depending on
151. erical model Surfaces from these layers data objects Raster Grid of Kx or Import these as Select these data Recharge data from surface data objects objects when defining Surfer ESRI GRD properties or Recharge boundary conditions Visual MODFLOW Select the Numerical Select these files when project or USGS model workflow after prompted to Import MODFLOW files creating a project Model Learn more 521 9 Learning more gt See Importing Datal71 for details on importing GIS data images excel spreadsheets or XYZ text gt See Creating Data Objectsh13 for more details on digitizing new point polygon or polyline data 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help 4 1 4 1 1 objects gt See Creating Surfaces 112 for more details on interpolating XYZ data to be used as geological layers or 2D parameter distributions Importing Data VMOD Flex supports importing data from various standard data types to allow you flexibility in constructing your conceptual model Data can be imported and used in several ways spatial data can be used to delineate and visualize geometry of structural zones horizons and features of your conceptual model while attribute data can be used in assigning properties to structural zones and attributes to boundary conditions About the Import Process The data import process in VMOD Flex varies slightly depending on the data type being imported However in general
152. ers that will be defined e g conductivity storage or initial heads The data input grid below will display the appropriate parameters based on 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 198 which parameter group is selected For example if conductivity is selected the data input grid will show the parameters Kx Ky and Kz The data input grid will already be populated with the default values specified in the Project Settings File gt Project Settings e VMOD Flex provides various methods for assigning parameter attributes The available methods include Constant Value Use Surface Use 3D Gridded Data and Use Shapefile available only when property zone is defined using polygon data object The type of method used can be specified per parameter For each parameter in the data input grid there is a combo box in the Method row shown below Property Values Group of parameters to define Conductivity Kx Ky Kz Parameter Unit Method Value Object Mapping Each method is described in the following sections Constant Value The Constant Value method is selected by default for each parameter in the data input grid and allows you to specify a spatially constant value for the parameter If you do not wish to use the default value enter a new value Use Surface The Use Surface method allows you use an existing surface data object to define spatially variable attribute values This
153. esired property group selected and visible in the Flex Viewer And make the desired 2D viewer active Then right click on the desired property group in the tree as shown below and select Settings 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow Ea 5 AIRPORT TRANSIENT grid M Run 5 _ Inputs H Properties E i 7 Bacleusand Particlae Delete CIO Add Time 0 D i C Draw CompositeView Time Series Compare Export 3D Viewer Expand to selection 4 Expand all child nodes Collapse all The 2D Colors and Contour line settings can be adjusted For more details see Color and Contour settings hes Export Heads The calculated heads or drawdown can be exported to shapefile see Exporth2o for more details 10 12 2 Charts In VMOD Flex you can view time series and calibration observed vs calculated charts Click on View Charts from the workflow tree and the following window will appear 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 315 VMOD Flex Help Calculated vs Observed PP a Calculated vs Observed Heads Time 1 Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 Calc Obs xPoen SGESE8G E k Calculated m EEE g E g uo EEEE S 274 294 314 334 354 374 Observed Head m To the left
154. esuassessasensbevonsss 248 Conv rting to FEFLOW lt sssacarssicicsscosonsossossonssssnsssteccanseccvonvonssnessesssonsescovscsetuasensensestestencsnasvaceacsbesoesoasensessessocssaess 252 Numerical Modeling Workflow 258 Define Objectives Define Numerical Model View Edit Grid Define Properties Theory n L a a E a E a Era a sue a e EE E a E E EENEN Define Boundary Conditions De A a The Oly AE T EEA A EE EAE ET Define Observations Define Zone Budget Zones Define Particles Select Engines Translation Settings MODFLOW soson rese eonia asee a es aao E aaae O a aaa esaia o aE Naa General Srann a a a aaa a ra aae aa eee Aea aaO a eaa ea EE E aa nai EAEE MODH OM SO UC TIS a a a Ea eae Rae ma EN EE TMe SIG PS aoea d easda aaaea Pea eane aaa acini ua vaa ARa raa o AEE p t Sana A Eai annaa aeaea SOIVETS cuss acer E n a a e a A a a a R a PCG Aei e a aaa a e a a a a aa a aa 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Contents 5 SIPS hy a a a E dave os aaa aaa avd oes a i e a E aS 288 SOR y y yl aa aa E a aaa aaa aa aaa A a A save Ea a hee EELEE 289 SAMGa Aigrette eS RNG E PGW eA EA ANE A O RS RTE ta 290 Recharge and Evapotranspira tioN eenaa EE STEE OSERE a iC ia NENEN EE 293 lakes oriori ser EE E EE A ie EEEN E Aa OEA ESE AE aE a EN ienet 294 LVS TVD TE E E E A E E T EE E EEEE 296 Celli RewWettihg arrniigosnrenin radara ea a e a a a a dls a a a aii 298 Initial Heads 301 PAAIE DY AAE E A E TE das Baa OS E E N
155. evation units meters x Source file data Number of Cross sections je Number of Wells fie Number of Interpretation j3 Cross section names Well names Interpretation names AA A i o AO OE NM lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel At the top of the dialog specify the cross section elevation units from the drop down list box You can choose from metres or feet The Source File Data frame contains information about the selected source file Here you can preview the Number of Cross sections in the source file along with the cross section names The Number of wells in the source data is shown along with the well names Finally the number and type of interpretations in the source data are shown e g Model Geology and HydroGeology Click the Finish button to import the cross section data Upon importing a new cross section data object will be added to the Data Explorer Maps Site maps of the model region such as aerial photographs topographic maps and satellite imagery are often useful for gaining a perspective of the dimensions of the model and for locating important characteristics of the model Although maps do not contain any specific data used in the calculations and the presence of a map does not influence the results of the simulation they are useful for enhancing visualization of the model VMOD Flex supports the following raster graphics file types BMP Bitmap 2012 by Schlumberger Water
156. f again However the solution may become less accurate since cells that should become wet might stay dry e Modify the Wetting factor value This will increase or decrease the new head in cells which are wetted e Change the Wetting method that controls cell wetting e Change the Wetting head option that calculates the new head in the wetted cell e Try using the SIP or PCG solver and modifying the solver parameters e For steady state solutions start with good initial head estimates This will provide good indications of which cells should be wet and dry and therefore conversions of cells 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services so VMOD Flex Help between wet and dry will be minimized 10 10 1 9 Initial Heads In VMOD Flex the Initial Heads are defined at the stage of Defining the Properties For more details please see the section Define Property Zones Initial Heads fz67 Translate _Trenslate General 4 General Settings Initial head options Use Specified Heads 5 MODFLOW 2005 Previous MODFLOW Run HDS file Settings Time Steps Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Initial head options Initial haad options e Use Specified Heads will use the values that are defined for Initial Heads at the Define Properties step e Use Ground Elevation will use the elevation values for the of layer 1 e
157. f data may take a significant time to import To improve importing and viewing performance select the Import a reduced grid size option and specify a value in the Import every nth node box For example if a value of 2 is defined then VMOD Flex will only display every other node in the 3D grid Next select the appropriate Data Category Unit and Data Type for each of the mapped attributes 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data Data Import The final dialog in the import process for 3D Gridded shows the grid dimensions of the source data 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help 4 1 7 Data Import Oj x Source dimension Number of rows Number of layers Number of columns Number of time steps Cell top elevation attribute me 4 lt Back Einish Cancel Help The Source Dimensions frame displays the Number of Rows Number of Layers Number of Columns and Number of Time Steps in the source data Finally click the Finish button to import the 3D Gridded data Cross Sections VMOD Flex is capable of importing 3D cross sections generated by Hydro GeoAnalyst HGA data management software For information on how to create 3D cross section in HGA please refer to the HGA User s Manual For HGA product information please visit our website www swstechnology com or contact your Schlumberger Water Services sales representative 2012 by Schlumber
158. f matrices The inner iterations continue until the user defined maximum number of inner iterations are executed or the final convergence criteria are met The Outer iterations continue until the final convergence criteria are met on the first inner iteration after an update The following is a description of the solver parameters for the PCG method e Maximum Number of Outer Iterations Default 25 This parameter provides an upper limit on the number of outer iterations to be performed The maximum number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution is not reached beforehand Twenty five iterations should be adequate for most problems However if the maximum number of outer iterations is reached and an appropriate mass balance error is not achieved this value should be increased e Maximum Number of Inner Iterations Default 10 This parameter provides an upper limit on the number of inner iterations to be performed This number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution for the current set of matrices in the outer iteration is not reached beforehand Ten inner iterations should be adequate for most problems More than ten iterations will not usually improve the solution as the solution is updated again when it returns to the outer iterations e Head Change Criterion for Convergence Default 0 01 After each outer iteration has completed the solver checks for the maximum change in the solution at every cell
159. ffice or Microsoft Access Database Engine NOTE Microsoft Office 64 bit version is currently not supported for XLS and MDB import Note If you intend to build complex projects it is recommended that you upgrade to the specifications in the above list VMOD Flex 64 bit version is supported on Vista 64 bit and Windows 7 64 bit If you have any problems with your particular system configuration please contact your system administrator or SWS technical support sws support slb com 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 3 VMOD Flex Help Installation VMOD Flex is distributed on one DVD ROM To install please follow these directions Note For detailed installation instructions please refer to the VMOD Flex Getting Started Guide Place the DVD into your DVD ROM drive and the initial installation screen should load automatically Once loaded an installation interface will be presented On the installation screen you may choose from the following two buttons VMOD Flex Installation and VMOD Flex User s Manual The User s Manual button will display a PDF document of the manual which requires Adobe Reader to view If you do not have Adobe Reader a link has been created in the interface to download the appropriate software The Installation button will initiate the installation of VMOD Flex on your computer VMOD Flex must be installed on your local hard disk in order to run Follow the installation instructions and read the on
160. flow 288 Factorization Level Default 0 There are two levels of factorization available with the WHS solver 0 and 1 Level 0 requires more outer iterations but less memory Level 1 requires fewer outer iterations but more memory While convergence of the solver requires fewer iterations with a factorization level of 1 the memory required to run the solver increases with this factorization level Also the work per iteration increases with the level 1 factorization such that the total solution time may not be less than the solution time using level 0 factorization The Strongly Implicit Procedure also known as SIP is a method for solving a large system of simultaneous linear equations by iterations The advantage of the SIP solver is that it is very stable and generally converges to a solution but often very slowly It is not as fast as the PCG method but it requires less memory to compute the final solution Because each equation involves up to seven unknown values of head and because the set of unknown values changes from one equation to the next throughout the grid the equations for the entire grid must be solved simultaneously at each time step This package is described in Chapter 12 of the MODFLOW manual included with your VMOD Flex media in the Manual folder The solver parameters for the SIP method are described below Maximum Number of Iterations Default 200 This is the upper limit on the number of iterations to be per
161. formed The maximum number of iterations will only be considered if a convergent solution is not reached beforehand Two hundred iterations should be adequate for most problems However if the maximum number of iterations is reached and an appropriate mass balance error is not achieved this value should be increased Number of Iteration Parameters Default 5 The finite difference equations describing the groundwater flow system can be put into matrix form as A h q Where A is the coefficient matrix h is the heads array and q is the flux array The number of iteration parameters indicates the number of parameters that will be used to transform the initial coefficient matrix A to a similar matrix that can be decomposed into two lower and upper triangular matrices L and U respectively The default value of 5 is generally sufficient Acceleration Factor Default 1 The acceleration factor controls the magnitude of head change between iterations The acceleration factor must be positive Values larger than one will result in larger head changes between iterations the solution may be approached faster but it may also overshoot the solution more easily Values less than one will result in smaller head changes requiring more iterations to reach a solution Head Change Criterion for Convergence Default 0 01 After each iteration is completed the solver checks for the maximum change in the solution at every cell If the maxi
162. g blocks In the Define Conceptual Model window as shown above define the settings for the conceptual model 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 183 VMOD Flex Help Enter a unique name for the conceptual model in the Name field Enter a description of the conceptual model in the Description field optional Specify a start date from the Start Date combo box This will be used for calculating the start date for transient model runs NOTE If you are using pumping wells the start date must match the first start time for your pumping schedule From the Data Explorer select the polygon data object that represents the conceptual model horizontal boundary and then click the button Note The model area cannot be defined using a complex polygon or one that contains multiple polygons A complex polygon is a polygon that intersects with itself Click the Save button Once you are finished click Next Step to proceed Conceptual Model Tree Once a conceptual model is created a new conceptual model tree is added to the Conceptual Model Explorer The conceptual model tree sets up the workflow for structural and property modeling assigning boundary conditions numerical grid creation and numerical model translation A typical conceptual model tree is shown below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 184 Conceptual Model E SE DRUMCO 5 2 Simulation Domain i O M
163. geological formations property model and boundary conditions are all designed outside the model grid or mesh this allows the flexibility to adjust your interpretation of the groundwater system before applying a discretization method and converting to a numerical model Build the model with minimal data pre processing required Working with grid independent data allows you to maximize the use of your existing GIS data and incorporate physical geology and geographic conditions before designing a grid or mesh Generate and simulate regional and local scaled models With support for MODFLOW LGR package you can design local grids around areas of interest directly within the conceptual model environment Calculated heads from a regional model can also be used as boundary conditions for local scaled models Design the correct model faster The grid independent raw data is left intact and is not constricted by grid cells or mesh elements when modifying the data and project objective This allows you to generate multiple numerical models from the same conceptual model e Make changes to the model data and immediately see results The conceptual model environment provides simultaneous 2D and 3D views which are updated whenever changes to the data are made This document provides detailed descriptions of all features and functionality available in VMOD Flex 9 How to get started gt Study this Introduction chapter and Program Overviewl s
164. ger Water Services Working with Your Data s When across section is created in HGA s 3D Explorer a file 3XS is saved in the v3D folder located in the HGA project folder By default the location of this folder is C Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Project Name v3D A 3XS file contains information on the wells and layers of each cross section The cross section can contain geology hydrogeology and model layer interpretation layers When imported into VMOD Flex this data can be used for generating surfaces and horizons from interpretation layers or simply for visualization purposes To import a cross section file in VMOD Flex follow the steps below Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu Select Cross Section from the Data Type drop down list Click the button and locate the source file Enter a Name and a Description for the data and click Next to continue Next select the Coordinate System of the cross section If the coordinate system is different than the one defined in the project settings VMOD Flex will perform a geotransformation converting all coordinates to the project s coordinate system Click the Next button to continue to the next step The final step involves selecting the elevation units and previewing the cross section data 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 99 vmoD Flex Help 4 1 8 GB File Import i lo0 x Define the el
165. gth of each grid cell in the X direction e DY is the length of each grid cell in the Y direction If the Use default Leakance option is turned off the fields used for calculating the River Conductance value Lakebed Thickness Lakebed Kz are removed from the table and the Leakance field becomes a writable field where a value may be entered Supported Geometry The geometry for Lake boundary conditions can be specified using polygon data objects Specified Flux 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 227 VMOD Flex Help For finite difference models VMOD Flex supports the Specified Flux FHB1 package for MODFLOW After translation the specified flux input data for MODFLOW is stored in the projectname FHB file Currently translation of this boundary condition is not supported for finite element models The Specified Flux boundary condition allows you to specify flow as a function of time at selected model cells FHB1 is an alternative and or supplement to the recharge RCH package for simulating specified flow boundary conditions The main differences between the FHB1 package and the recharge package are as follows e FHB1 package can simulate specified flux on the top side bottom or intermediate layers in the simulation domain whereas the recharge package can only be applied to the top and intermediate layers e FHB1 package allows you to specify a starting flux and an ending flux for each stress period if transient The
166. h of the well in the Zmin field Adding Well Screens To add an item to the Well Screen table follow the steps below e Make sure the Screens option is selected from the Data to Display box e Select a Well from the Well Head table Click the Add Row button from the Screens toolbar to add a new item to the table e Enter a screen identification number in the Screen ID field e Enter a screen top elevation or measured depth in the Screen Top field e Enter a screen bottom elevation or measured depth in the Screen Bottom field Note For Horizontal Wells the screen values for Screen Top and Screen Bottom should be entered as a measured depth MD along the wellbore with respect to the well head see image below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 137 VMOD Flex Help 7 MD length of wellbore along path TVD Vertical depth independent of path Wellbore Adding Editing Pumping Well Schedule The Pumping Schedule table is used to enter the well pumping rates for specified time periods Negative pumping rate values are used for extraction wells and positive pumping rates are used for injection wells Pumping well schedules are defined for well screens and therefore a screen must exist before a pumping schedule can be defined To add pumping schedule items to the pumping schedule table e Make sure the Screens option is selected from the Data to Display box e Select a Well from the Well Hea
167. hapefile see Exportk2 for more details When you are finished with viewing the grid click Next Step to proceed to the Define Properties step 10 4 Define Properties At this step you can view edit the flow properties for the model 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 264 EA MODFLOW Flex sample O grid Run e N ran x a9 Fie Tools Window Help Workflow 8x D H om OF Be Data n amp drumco Elevation 1 E Define Modeling Objectives I Inspect Define Properties crumco Elevation 2 EJ View Edit Grid B dumco Bevation 3 J Define Properties a BHA amp drumco Elevation 4 Define Boundary C amp drumco Elevation 5 H Sel ma R P AP h D Eaggeration 10 amp dumco Bevation 6 Ta 1 amp jh A VMod Imported Wells e Column View e Row 1 J35 7 Column 1 J5 Model Explorer e a 3D FDRUMCO Model Boundary Be Structure Toolbox d C Horizons Conductivity M Zones Properties Zones Z amp Simulation Domain Model Domain Database Layer View S E Boundary Conditions Pumping Wells Boundary Condition DRUMCO grid 5 Run L
168. harge and Evapotranspiration Options Recharge Translate as IN OUT flow property on top Translate Recharge to 2nd type boundary condition Evapotranspiration Translate as IN OUT flow property on top Translate Evapotranspiration to 2nd type boundary condition The Packages frame contains a list of existing boundary conditions for the conceptual model being translated Here you can include exclude boundary conditions by selecting the appropriate check box in the Translate column The corresponding FEFLOW condition type is listed for each boundary condition under the FEFLOW Conditions column You can also select how Recharge and Evapotranspiration should be represented As Flow Properties or as Type2 Boundary Condition 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 257 VMOD Flex Help Click the Next button to initiate the model translation During translation output details are displayed in the translation log Once finished click the Finish button to exit the translation wizard 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 258 10 Numerical Modeling Workflow This chapter presents information on editing data in a numerical model workflow the numerical model can originate from e Importing a Visual MODFLOW or MODFLOW project or e Executing a Conceptual to Numerical Model conversion The numerical modeling workflow provides the tools for building the numerical model p
169. he entire model domain e Click OK when you are finished e Use the same tools as described in the previous step to manipulate the views e The display tools will allow you to switch from discrete cells rendering to color shading contours HH Render as cells Show color shading Show hide contour lines il Show hide grid lines e In the Toolbox you can select a different parameter group for example Initial Heads and see the corresponding zonation in the Flex Viewers e Click Next Step to proceed to the Boundary Conditions step View Edit Boundary Conditions e Atthis step you can view edit the flow boundaries for the model 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials e O O l Inspect Define Boundary Conditions J KAA Select the Next Step Lisi rf FaOe I Define Observation Zones v Layer Layer View I Define Observation Wells 1 i IJ Define Zone Budget Zones I Define Particles Row Select Run Type 1 PEST Run Single Run Column Translate Run Numerical Engines EJ MODFLOW 2005 3D View Results E View Charts E View Maps Toolbox Constant Head Edit Layer 1 Row 37 Column 2 X 3183 36 Y 1124295 Atrribute e From the toolbox select the Desired Boundary condition group Constant Head Rivers etc e Then select Edit Single or Edit Group e Click on a cell that belongs to this group a dialog will appear whe
170. he Transform button to georeference the image The georeferenced image will then be displayed in the Preview tab Editing Georeference Points To edit a georeference point e Select the georeference point from the Control Points Table e Once selected click the Edit button located just beneath the control points table e A Georeference point window will appear prompting for the X and Y world coordinates of the selected location e Enter the new X and or Y coordinates for this point e Click the Ok button Note You must click the Transform button again in order for the georeferencing to update to reflect the modified X Y values Deleting Georeference Points To delete a georeference point 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data e Select the georeference point from the Control Points Table 104 e Once selected click the Delete button located just beneath the control points table Configure Georeferencing Options When the Configure Georeferencing Options button is selected the following dialog will open Settinos hl M Orginal Points Style CrossCircle se Size 12 cir M Style Size Color Apply OK Cancel Symbols Tab M Georeference Points Circle b 8 This tab allows you to change the style settings of the original control points and the georeference points Choose a Style symbol Size and Color A preview of the symbo
171. hen the value assigned to DAMP is used as a constant damping parameter If AADAMP 0 then the value of DAMP is used for the first nonlinear iteration The damping parameter is adaptively varied on the basis of the head change using Cooley s method for subsequent iterations e Head change criterion HCLOSE After every outer iteration is completed the solver checks for the maximum change in the solution at every cell If the maximum change in the solution is below a set convergence tolerance set here in the working units of feet or metres then the solution has converged and the solver stops otherwise a new outer iteration is started A solution accurate to 0 01 ft or m will normally be sufficient for most problems unless the maximum head change throughout the modeled domain is less than 1 foot or metre If an appropriate mass balance is not achieved and the number of inner and outer iterations is within the maximums this value can be decreased by an order of magnitude e Residual criterion RCLOSE RCLOSE is the residual convergence criterion for the inner iteration The PCG algorithm computes the I2 norm of the residual and compares it against RCLOSE Typically RCLOSE is set to the same value as HCLOSE see below If RCLOSE is set too high then additional outer iterations may be required due to the linear equation not being solved with sufficient accuracy On the other hand a too restrictive setting for RCLOSE for nonlinear problems may
172. her child grid Note The child grid cannot be rotated it must be in the same orientation as the parent grid 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 239 VMOD Flex Help 8 2 Click the Preview button to preview the child grid in the adjacent 2D Viewer Click the Next button to proceed to the next step Vertical Grid Refinement Vertical grid refinement involves selecting which model layers to refine and specifying the refinement ratio for the selected layers io Define Vertical Grid Refinement m Specify End Layer Start fi End Bo mM Refinement ratio Globally for all layers z a an i Previous Einish Cancel The top of the child grid must always coincide with the parent grid and therefore the Start layer will always be 1 However the End layer can be any model layer below the top model layer in the simulation domain There are two options for defining the refinement ratio Select Globally for all layers to assign a single refinement ratio to all layers Alternatively select Specify each layer to assign a refinement ratio layer by layer Note Although the top layer must be the start layer vertical refinement does not have to start at the top Assign a refinement ratio of 1 1 to the top layer and it will not be refined Click the Finish button to create the child grid Create Finite Element Mesh Quick Overview 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining G
173. her files will be generated this can be modified if you wish e Click the button circled above to proceed this will read the input from the numerical model and translate this into the various input files needed by MODFLOW and the other engines The files will be created in the directory defined in the previous step Visual MODFLOW Flex demo_ DRUMCO grid a File Tools Window Help Workflow 82x PESAN oom DB Data 1 dumco Bevation 1 EJ Define Modeling Objectives L 1 dumco Elevation 2 S E Define Numerical Mode Translate 1 drumco Elevation 3 I Create Grid 1 crumco Bevation 4 EJ Import Model 1 dumco Bevation 5 EJ View Edit Grid Translation Log Detals i 1 drumco Elevation 6 EJ Define Properties I Mh ed Well Define Boundeyy Conde 1249 28 PM Intialize a TAAL Wed imported Wels i rae aaa 12 49 28 PM Finalize p E Sea a 12 48 28 PM Initialize I Define Observation Zones 12 49 28 PM Finalize Ii Define Observation Wells 1249 28 PM Intialize Define Zone Budget Zon 12 49 28 PM Finalize peaa e 4928 PM tate 12 49 28 PM Finalize B E Select Run Type 12 49 28 PM Initialize I PEST Run 12 49 28 PM c Schlumberger Water Services EJ Single Run 12 49 28 PM Translate Stat 12 49 28 PM Section Co ordinate system ES eco 1249 28 PM Finalize a 12 49 28 PM NDC Package ao 12 49 28 PM No Dry Cell Package translator Initialize 12 49 28 PM No Dry Cell Package translator F
174. horizontal grid using 20 rows and 20 columns with no rotation However you can customize the grid to your liking by modifying the settings in the horizontal grid dialog Shown below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 231 VMOD Flex Help Name NumericalGrid1 Define Horizontal Grid B Define Numerical Grid Rotation poe nA 0 Add Data Object Grid Size Rows Cell Height 100 130 000 Columns Cell Width 100 130 000 Grid Extents Xmin Xmax Width 3000 000 16000 000 13000 000 Ymin Ymax Height 3000 000 Enter a unique Name for the numerical grid This name will appear in the Conceptual Model tree once the grid is created The grid can be rotated counter clockwise about the grid origin by entering a value between 0 and 360 in the Rotation text field The Xmin and Ymin values refer to the X Y coordinates of the bottom left corner of the numerical grid The Xmax and Ymax values refer to the X Y coordinates of the top right corner of the numerical grid The Columns and Rows fields allow you to define the Grid Size The maximum grid size supported by VMOD Flex is 5000 rows by 5000 columns Click the Next button to proceed to define the vertical discretization Defining the Vertical Grid 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 232 B Define Numerical Grid lelak Define Vertical Grid Grid Type Defomed v Create Child Grid Descripti
175. hs Zone Budget e Click on the Zone Budget button to launch Zone Budget charts this option is only available if you have run Zone Budget see Select Engines 73 for more details e The features of the Zone Budget graphs are described in the VMOD Classic Interface documentation Please see section 9 3 4 Zone Budget Graphs 10 12 3 Compare Heads and Drawdown VMOD Flex allows you to compare Heads or Drawdown between several model runs This is useful to determining differences in pre and post pumping heads or comparing impacts to heads or drawdown when adjusting property or boundary condition parameters Follow the steps below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 317 VMOD Flex Help e Right click on the Heads node of any model run and select the Compare option The following dialog will appear Compare Heads tx Heads from Numerical Model MODFLOW HDS File There are two options available e Select a Heads from the Output tree from another model run in this case click on the Heads node from another model run and click on the 3 button to add this to the field e Select a MODFLOW HDS file from the hard drive from another model Click on the Open folder button and browse to a HDS file on the hard drive e Click OK Anew view will appear The plot shows the results of subtracting the heads selected specified above from the Heads where you launched the Compare Heads option 2012 by Schlumbe
176. ially variable attributes to boundary conditions and property zones VMOD Flex supports the following file types for 3D Gridded data e MODFLOW Heads file HDS 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 4 e TecPlot DAT Note In order to import data from MODFLOW HDS files the source file must exist in the folder that contains all associated MODFLOW data files e g DIS NAM etc To import 3D Gridded data follow the steps below e Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu e Select 3D Gridded Data from the Data Type drop down list e Click the button and locate the source file e Enter a Name and a Description for the imported data and click Next to continue e Next select the Coordinate System of the 3D Gridded data If the coordinate system is different than the one defined in the project settings VMOD Flex will perform a geotransformation converting all coordinates to the project s coordinate system Click the Next button to continue to the next step The next step allows you to specify how the gridded data is to be imported inixi IV Gridded data for an existing grid Numerical grid object you want to assign the data to Import the true grid dimensions High quality slower performance Import a reduced grid size Lower quality higher performance The true grid data can be retrieved from the data object after import Impo
177. id screen specify the type of vertical discretization for this exercise the default Deformed grill be used More details on the grid types can be found in the Defining Grids Meshes z2l section e Leave the defaults as is click the Finish button The Grid will then appear as shown in the following screen 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials File Tools Window Help Workflow A x O El amp Data DA ground Define Modeling Objectives a z A D iayer2top Collect Data Objects View Finite Difference Grid D iayer2bottom Define Conceptual Model Views RP PROF OO boundary Define Model Structure F Layer OG chdeast EJ Define Property Zones Layer View OG chd west EJ Select the Next Step 1 amp DOG rivers EJ Select Grid Type I View Finite Element Mesh Ff View Finite Difference Grid 1 C S camii a Geum e 3D Toolbox Model Explorer li Conceptual Model 1 Model Boundary E EERE EEE EHH ietTueHEistosanteteanieeeetaaeetitte S E Structure HH c C Horizons HHHH HEHH C Horizont C Horizon2 C Horizon3 Zones Zone1 Zone2 Properties lay Conductivity Property Zone 1 Property Zone 2 5 Simulation Domain S5 E Model Domain E Boundary Conditions C Constant Head 1 C Constant Head West NumericalGrid1 Layer 1 Row 85 Column 1 X 3128 17 Y 5050 7 Atrribute ft Conceptual Model 3D Viewer 1 e Click Next Step to pr
178. idation rules for each mapped column are as follows e Xand Y values must be a numeric value and present in each row of the mapped data e Data columns will be deemed invalid if VMOD Flex detects a null blank field e Data in each column must satisfy the specified data type If invalid data exists you can choose to import this data anyway Otherwise you can select the Do Not Import Rows with Warnings check box and VMOD Flex will not import any rows deemed invalid In the bottom half of the dialog there are two options e Show only errors and warnings When selected only the records deemed invalid will be shown in the preview table Records that are deemed invalid will be colored either red error or yellow warning e Show this amount When selected you can view a specified number of records in the preview table below Enter a value and then click the Apply button to show the records both valid amp invalid in the preview table Click the Finish button to import the data Once imported a data object will be added in the Data Explorer 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data so 4 1 2 Polylines Polyline data consists of a series of points vertices connected by lines Polyline data objects can be used in VMOD Flex for defining geometry and assigning attributes to linear boundary conditions such as River and Drain boundary conditions Polylines may also be useful to visualizing geographic
179. ight 100 130 000 Columns Cell Width 100 130 000 Grid Extents Xmin Xmax Width 3000 000 16000 000 13000 000 Ymin Ymax Height 3000 000 Enter a unique Name for the numerical grid This name will appear in the Conceptual Model tree once the grid is created Enter the grid size and optionally the grid rotation The grid can be rotated counter clockwise about the grid origin by entering a value between 0 and 360 in the Rotation text field e The Xmin and Ymin values refer to the X Y coordinates of the bottom left corner of the numerical grid The Xmax and Ymax values refer to the X Y coordinates of the top right corner of the numerical grid e The Columns and Rows fields allow you to define the Grid Size e Type 100 for both the rows and columns e Click the Next button to proceed to define the vertical discretization 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help e Define Numerical Grid Define Vertical Grid Grid Type Deformed S Create Child Grid Description In a deformed grid mesh the tops and bottoms of the model layers follow the horizons elevations You can refine the mode layers by dividing the zones into proportionately thick layers Znin 184 170855920891 Min Cell Thickness Zmax 0 1 363 466310940812 Layer Refinement Exaggeration 0 Row f loela Column lt lt Back Finish Cancel e In the Define Vertical Gr
180. ime steps whereby the model will calculate the head solution at each time step The default value for Time steps is 10 The time step Multiplier is the factor used to increment the time step size within each stress period i e it is the ratio of the value of each time step to that of the preceding time step The default value is 1 2 A time step Multiplier value greater than 1 will produce smaller time steps at the beginning of a stress period resulting in a better representation of the changes of the transient flow field Thus increasing the number of time steps in a simulation may result in smoother head or drawdown versus time curves The Steady state column indicates if the stress period is transient or steady state This option is available if MODFLOW 2000 MODFLOW 2005 and MODFLOW SURFACT is selected as the numeric engine for the flow model These engines allow individual stress periods in a single simulation to be either transient or steady state instead of requiring the entire simulation to be either steady state or transient Steady state and transient stress periods can occur in any order Commonly the first stress period may be run as steady state to produce a solution that is used as the initial condition for subsequent transient stress periods 10 10 1 4 Solvers VMOD Flex comes with a choice of different solvers to use in solving the numerical equations for the flow simulation 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical M
181. imes In Visual MODFLOW a Time Period is similar to a Stress Period but with two important exceptions 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 274 A Time Period is defined using real times and real time units and Each boundary condition grid cell may contain different Time Periods The advantage of this approach is the ability to clearly see the magnitude of time for each Time Period as opposed to interpreting data such as from Stress Period 1 to Stress Period 2 and it facilitates more convenient methods for importing raw data from different boundary condition types Each group of boundary condition grid cells requires a minimum of one Time Period of data containing a Start Time a Stop Time and a complete set of data for the selected boundary condition type the required data for each boundary condition type are described later in this section For steady state simulations Visual MODFLOW requires data for only a single Time Period while for transient simulations Visual MODFLOW can accommodate an unlimited number of Time Periods For steady state simulations the Stop Time value is irrelevant because the term steady state indicates that the model results are not changing with time Therefore a Stop Time value of 1 time unit is commonly used However if the model is going to be used to evaluate a transient simulation in the future it is probably a better idea to give it a more realistic valu
182. in 573851 95385850687 Y Min 4863459 610148631 E Advanced Settings Number of Neighbors 10 Grid Settings It Defines the number of data nodes along axis M Interpolation Domain MV Use a polygon extent Pobgon_boundary OK Cancel Help When the polygon data object is selected the interpolation domain values in the settings grid will update with the X Y extents of the selected polygon data object 4 4 Creating New Data Objects The 2D Viewer provides interactive drawing tools which allow you to create your own polygon polyline and point data objects This feature can be useful for digitizing boundary condition areas property zones or your conceptual model boundary To create a new polygon polyline or points data object follow the steps below e In the Data Explorer right click and select Create New Data Object from the pop up menu The following dialog will display 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services u VMOD Flex Help x Layer Type nn Layer Name e Select the data object type from the Layer Type combo box e Enter a name for the data object in the Layer Name field e Click the Ok button to create the new data object Once created the new data object will appear in the Data Explorer From here you can define the geometry of the data object using the 2D Viewer editing tools Digitizing amp Editing Geometry in 2D Viewers The 2D Viewer allows you to create
183. in using imported or digitized Polygon or Polyline data objects or by manually selecting the sides of the simulation domain using an interactive 3D Viewer Each option is described below e Top Selecting this option will apply the boundary condition to the top layer of the simulation domain e Bottom Selecting this option will apply the boundary condition to the bottom layer of the 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 205 VMOD Flex Help simulation domain e Side Selecting this option will allow you to apply the boundary condition to a single side or combination of sides of the simulation domain When this option is selected you will be required to define the geometry of the boundary condition by selecting the desired sides of the simulation domain using an interactive 3D Viewer For more information on how to do this please see Defining Boundary Condition Geometry Sides section e Intermediate Selecting this option will allow you to assign the boundary condition to an intermediate model layer within the simulation domain by specifying a Connection Elevation value Upon translation VMOD Flex will assign the boundary condition to the appropriate model layer based on the defined connection elevation value The next step is to define the geometry of the boundary condition Boundary conditions that are applied to the top bottom or intermediate layers can be defined by using a Polygon areal or Polyline linear data objec
184. inalize 12 49 28 PM NAM Package 12 49 28 PM Name Fie translator Initialize 12 49 28 PM Name Fie translator Finalize 12 49 28 PM setetteseteetetetetets MODPATH Translation Star stttsseettesteetts 12 48 28 PM MODPATH MAIN data fie Initialize 12 49 28 PM MODPARH translator Active cells for Layer 1 12 49 28 PM MODPARH translator Active cells for Layer 2 12 49 28 PM MODPARH translator Active cells for Layer 3 12 49 28 PM MODPARH translator Active cells for Layer 4 12 49 28 PM MODPARH translator Active cells for Layer 5 Model Explorer 3 Wells Boundary Condition a jid 12 49 28 PM MODPATH MAIN data fie Finalize 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Starting Forward Particles Locations Fle Initialize lts 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Starting Forward Particles Locations Fie Finalize Properties 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Forward Respond Fie Initialize 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Forward Respond File Finalize C Fow 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Name Fie Initialize C Conductivity 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Name File Finalize Ki L Storage 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Stating Backward Particles Locations Fle Intialze LD Intialtleads 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Starting Backward Particles Locations File Finalize 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Backward Respond Fie Intialize Boundary Conditions 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Backward Respond File Finalize O Recharge 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Name File Initialize Evapotranspiration 12 49 28 PM MODPATH Name File Finalize C Constant Heads 12 49 28 PM sisteetteetetstee
185. ing Wells I Define Boundary Conditc 200 Define Boundary Conditions Define Pumping Wells van Bas N Define Surface Water Network Model Explorer E E Conceptual Model 1 i C Model Boundary 2 Structure i GL Horizons C Horizont Horizon2 j h Horizon3 l C Zones M Zone1 j M Zone2 G A Properties B Conductivity C Property Zone 1 Property Zone 2 S A Simulation Domain 5 C Model Domain j Boundary Conditions lt m r 4 Conceptual Model 3D Viewer 1 Quick Overview Instructions Define hydrological boundaries sources sinks for the model Pre requisites Structural Zoneshs4 have been created Property Zonesh92 have been created You have imported or created the data objects h1 you want to use for defining boundary conditions For example polylines for the geometry or Surfaces or time schedule for defining the attributes Result A conceptual boundary condition object is created Next Steps Create Finite Difference Gridkes or Create Finite Element Meshksal Background 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 202 Every conceptual model requires an appropriate set of boundary conditions to represent the system s relationship with the surrounding systems In the case of groundwater flow model b
186. ing and resulting volume models 00000000 5 Define Property Zones 192 parameter values for Conductivity Initial Heads Storativity 6 Define Boundary Conditions 200 constant heads drains pumping wells surface water network etc 7 Define Numerical Grid or Finite Element Meshl228 Finite Difference Grid used for MODFLOW Finite Element Mesh used for FEFLOW 8 Convert to Numerical Modelbaa generate numerical inputs for a MODFLOW model 9 Translate to Finite Element Modell2s2 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 178 generate FEFLOW ASCII FEM file for running in FEFLOW When a new conceptual model is created a new conceptual model tree is added to the Conceptual Model Explorer in the main VMOD Flex window The conceptual model tree consists of a fixed folder structure that is designed to guide you through the workflow of building your conceptual model 7 1 Define Modeling Objectives The first step in defining your numerical model is to Define the Modeling Objectives VMOD Flex currently supports saturated flow simulations only Future releases will support variably saturated flow density dependent flow and transport simulations The available engines provides a preview of what engines are available based on your selected objectives VMOD Flex supports e MODFLOW 2000 e MODFLOW 2005 e MODFLOW LGR e Zone Budget and e MODPATH 2012 by Schlumberger W
187. ins Vertices will be added along the lines creating subsegments with a specified length The option will refine areas around line add ins e Refinement around point add ins Use this option to refine areas around point add ins Refinement for point add ins is defined by specifying the number of triangles directly around the points and the desired distance from the point to the new vertices Use the Gradation slider bar to specify the smoothness of the transition from the fine elements around the 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 24a points to the coarser elements A smoother transition will result in more elements but will lead to more regular elements therefore improved model stability Polygon Refinement You can use one or more polygon data objects that have been included in the superelement mesh see Create Finite Element Meshiea1 to define localized areas of mesh refinement To do so click the Polygons Refinement button The Polygon Refinement screen will appear m e Polygon Refinement Refinement Polygons 0 no refinement Polygon ID Number of Elements Polygon 1_0 1000 In the left side of the Polygon Refinement window all features in the polygon add ins are listed in a table under the Polygon ID column When a feature is selected it is highlighted yellow in the adjacent 2D Viewer Select the polygon feature that represents that area of the mesh for which r
188. ion field Note The Xmin Xmax Ymin Ymax Zmin and Zmax fields are read only and cannot be changed e Alternatively you can set the position of a slice by entering a value in the Fraction field For example a fraction value of 0 5 will set the slice position in the middle of the 3D data e Click the OK button to apply the changes to the current 3D Viewer 3D Viewer Performance Preferences For details on adjusting the 3D View performance settings see 3D Viewer Preferences 13 Linking 2D Viewer with Attributes Table The 2D Viewer can be linked with the spreadsheet table such that when a polyline polygon or point feature is selected in the 2D viewer its corresponding attribute data is automatically highlighted in the spreadsheet table Likewise when an attribute row is selected in the spreadsheet table its corresponding feature is highlighted in the active 2D Viewer In order to have this bidirectional linking between viewer and spreadsheet table the 2D Viewer must be in Pick mode and the spreadsheet table must be opened Tip Data object spreadsheet tables can be viewed by right clicking on the data object in the Data Explorer and selecting Spreadsheet from the pop up menu 2D Viewers can be set to pick mode by selecting the Pick Mode button from the viewer sidebar 3D Animations The 3D Viewer can animate items and also record static or transient models to AVI file Right click on the 3D viewer and select the
189. ioning of these matrices is necessary for an efficient solution The WHS solver works on a two tier approach to a solution at one time step Outer iterations are used to vary the factorized parameter matrix in an approach toward the solution An outer iteration is where the hydrogeologic parameters of the flow system are updated i e transmissivity saturated thickness storativity in the factorized set of matrices Different levels of factorization allow these matrices to be initialized differently to increase the efficiency of solution and model stability Inner iterations are used to iteratively solve the matrices created in the outer iterations The solver parameters for the WHS method are described below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 287 VMOD Flex Help e Maximum Number of Outer non linear Iterations Default 50 This parameter provides an upper limit on the number of outer iterations to be performed The maximum number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution is not reached beforehand Fifty iterations should be adequate for most problems However if the maximum number of outer iterations is reached and an appropriate mass balance error is not achieved this value should be increased e Maximum Number of Inner Iterations Default 25 This parameter provides an upper limit on the number of inner iterations to be performed This number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution for the curr
190. ions are described briefly below Please note that the switch letters in parenthesis beside the name of each option refers to the command line switches used by the Triangle mesh generator Delaunay Triangulation Method L switch Delaunay triangulation methods are typically used in finite element mesh generation as they 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 243 VMOD Flex Help tend to maximize the minimum angle of all the angles of the triangles in the triangulation providing a nice set of triangles and avoiding narrow skinny triangles There are three triangulation methods from which to choose from Constrained Constrained Conforming and Conforming e Constrained Triangulation in which each segment appears as a single edge in the triangulation As such segments are not subdivided and new vertices are not added to the vertex set A constrained Delaunay triangulation is not truly a Delaunay triangulation because some of its triangles might not be delaunay e Constrained Conforming Triangulation in which triangles are constrained delaunay however additional vertices may be added to the vertex set and segments may be subdivided to ensure a user defined Minimum Angle constraint is satisfied If a minimum angle is not specified vertices are added to ensure all angles are between 20 and 140 degrees e Conforming Triangulation in which each triangle is truly delaunay and not just constrained delaunay Additional vertices may
191. ions for defining boundary condition attributes Attributes can be assigned from those stored in Surface Time Schedule Shapefile and 3D Gridded data objects You can also set attributes as Static no change over time or Transient changes over time e For this tutorial you will assign a static constant head value e In the empty field located below the Starting Head field type 347 for the Starting Head and Ending Head Finish button Repeat these steps to define the other constant head boundary condition e Click on Define Boundary Conditions in the tree e Select the Define Boundary Condition button e Choose Constant Head select the chd west polyline and define a value of 325 for both the Starting Head and Ending Head e Click Finish The following display will appear Before you proceed you will define one more boundary condition a River 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 3a e Click on Define Boundary Conditions in the tree and select the Define Boundary Condition button e Choose River for the boundary condition type e From the Data Explorer select the river polyline e Click the button in the Define Boundary Condition dialog to add this polyline to the input e A warning may appear about clipping the polyline click OK to continue e Click the Next button e Define the following attributes for the river Stage 335 Bottom 333 Riverbed Thickness 1 Width 10
192. isual MODFLOW is the integration of all of the numeric engines including MODFLOW 2000 MODFLOW 2005 MODFLOW LGR MODPATH Zone Budget To run a simulation with any or all of the above numeric engines be sure to select Run from the top menu bar of the Run section and the Engines to Run window will appear as shown in the following figure 1E View Edit Grid MODF 00 USGS MODFLOW 2000 from SWS E Define Properties v USGS MODFLOW 2005 from SWS Define Boundary Conditions USGS MODFLOW LGR from SWS ll Define Observation Zones ZONEBUDGET lll Define Observation Wells MODPATH H I Define Zone Budget Zones bi Define Particles B E Select Run Type fl PEST Run i D ES bo Translate i _ Run Numerical Engines View Results The Engine column lists the available numeric engines and the Run column indicates which numeric engines will be run during the simulation Any or all of the available numeric engines can be run for the simulation provided the required data files are present in the model project folder The MODFLOW engine can be run by itself without any requirements from any of the other engines The MODPATH engine requires a valid BGT file to be present in the project folder This file will be automatically created if MODFLOW and MODPATH are mutually selected 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow so The Zone B
193. ity Importing Storage Importing Initial Heads Properties Importing successfully finished Importing Visual MODFLOW Boundary Conditions Importing recharge and evapotransporation Reading VMod Project D Documents Visual MODFLOW Tutorial Drumco drumco 0000000 Importing Constant Heads Constant Head 1 Importing Rivers Ri River 1 Importing Pumping Wells Total Wells Imported 5 Creating well schedules Please wait import Boundary Conditions and Wells Successfully Finished Importing Visual MODFLOW ZoneBudget Importing Zone Bud i Zone Budget Successfully imported Importing Visual MODFLOW Particles Particles Successfully Imported 3 Wells Boundary Condition All jd Import Visual MODFLOW Observation Wells ow 1 les ow 10a i ow 14 Properties ow 15 E Fow ow 15a I Conductivity low 16 LI Storage low 17 a E IntialHeads w15 Boundary Condtions ow 1a E Recharge low 2 E Evapotranspiration jow 21 E Constant Heads eens E Constart Head t ow 28 E Rivers low 29 I River 0 low 31 EE River Ese E Pumping Wells z ie i Pumping Wells Boundary Col en Zone Budget ow5 Patticles pre E Forward Particles Este E Backward Particles Observation wells successfully imported impor finished succesfully e Progress The status of each model element is shown in the progress any detected errors will be shown here e Model Tree After the import
194. k Einish Cancel Click the Finish button to complete the polygon importing process Once imported a polyline data object will be added to the Data Explorer 4 1 3 Polygons Polygons are closed shapes consisting of vertices line segments and have at least 3 sides Polygons can be used in VMOD Flex in the following ways e To define the horizontal boundary of a conceptual model e To define the geometry and attributes of horizontal boundary conditions e g recharge specified head e To define the geometry and attributes of property zones e To visualize spatial variation of geographic features using various style settings e VMOD Flex supports the following file types for polygon data Shapefile SHP AutoCAD DXF To import polygon data follow the steps below Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu Select Polygon from the Data Type drop down list box Click the button and locate the source file Enter a Name and a Description for the imported data and click Next to continue 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 33 VMOD Flex Help 4 1 4 The remaining workflow for importing polygon data is very similar to that of importing Polylines For more information on how to import polygons please see Importing Polylines so Surfaces Surface data consists of an ordered array of interpolated values at regularly spaced intervals that represent the spatial distribu
195. l settings is shown in the boxes below Georeference Image Tab This tab allows you to define settings for the georeferenced image Each setting is described below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 105 VMOD Flex Help I Show Fill Color Fill color for empty area JPEG image quality LoT J H Interpolation Mode Default X When a georeferenced image is rotated you can fill the areas of empty space with a specified color Otherwise leave the check box unchecked and the empty space will show transparent Click the color box beside Fill color for empty area to select the color to fill the empty spaces only if Show Fill Color option is selected Use the slider to set the JPEG Image Quality When set closer to L low more compression is used in the saved georeference image file resulting in a smaller file and poorer quality When set close to H high less compression is used in the saved georeferenced image file resulting in a larger file with better quality From the Interpolation Mode combo box specify the interpolation method algorithm to use when the image is scaled or rotated The various interpolation methods are briefly described below Keep in mind lower quality interpolation mode will result in a smaller output file whereas high quality interpolation modes will result in a larger output file Default default interpolation mode LowQuality a low quality mode HighQuality a high quality mode
196. l appear where you can view edit the properties and boundaries on the numerical grid then translate and run MODFLOW and view the results For finite element models VMOD Flex will generate the FEM problem file for loading into FEFLOW Note FEFLOW v 5 4 or later is required for opening and running FEFLOW models This chapter walks you through the steps involved in translating a conceptual model to a numerical model and includes information on the following topics Converting to Numerical Modelk8 Converting to FEFLOW 252 9 1 Converting to MODFLOW Quick Overview Instructions Create a MODFLOW numerical model by populating the selected grid with data from the conceptual model Pre requisites Finite Difference Gridkzs has been created Result Anumerical model is generated and added to the model tree The numerical model workflow will appear Next Steps Numerical Modeling Workflowlee3 Once you have the conceptual model designed and at least one numerical grid you are ready to populate this grid with the conceptual data Proceed to the Convert to Numerical Model step in the Conceptual Model workflow this is shown in the display below The Select Grid combo box will list all the finite difference grids you have created for your project including grids for use in Local Grid Refinement LGR 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 249 VMOD Flex Help Select the grid you wish to use and click on the Convert to Num
197. layers e Click Finish when you are done e The new grid should now appear and you will also see the grid appear as a new node in the model tree e Click the Next step button to proceed Now you are ready to populate the numerical grid mesh with the conceptual elements The Convert to Numerical Model display should appear similar as below Now in the Select Grid combo box you will see there are 2 grids by default the grid you created should be selected e Click on the Convert to Numerical Model button to proceed 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials so Conceptual Model 9 OF Define Modeling Objectives Collect Data Objects Select Grid Define Conceptual Model NumericalGrid2 Define Model Structure Define Property Zones Select the Next Step Define Boundary Conditions I Define Surface Water Network Define Pumping Wells EJ Define Boundary Conditions E Select Grid Type I View Finite Bement Mesh View Finite Difference Grid Translate to FEFLOW Mode f Convert to MODFLOW Model Convert To Numerical e After clicking on the conversion button a new workflow window will appear which includes the steps for the numerical model for this new grid In the first window you will see the progress of the conceptual to numerical conversion This conversion could take several minutes depending on the size and type of grid you used and the complexity of the conc
198. le located below the grid description enter a refinement factor for the desired layer s For example a layer refinement factor of 2 would subdivide the layer into two equally spaced layers Layer Name Layer Refinement Zone1 2 Zone2 i 2 Zoned Apply After entering a refinement factor click the Apply button to view the changes in the adjacent 2D Viewer Uniform In a uniform grid a number of layers with uniform thickness will be created At the time of translating the conceptual model to the numerical model the properties will be assigned to the appropriate grid cells to represent the geological structure This grid is useful for transport or density dependent simulations where it is desirable to have fine vertical discretization 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 234 Cross sectional view of uniform grid from Visual MODFLOW When this grid type is selected specify the number of layers to create in the Number of Layers field default is 10 Note Maximum number of vertical layers is 1000 Deformed Uniform In a deformed uniform grid the top and bottom of the grid are deformed following the top most and bottom most horizons respectively in between a set of uniformly thick layers will be generated At the time of translating the conceptual model to the numerical model the properties will be assigned to the appropriate grid cells to represent the geological st
199. lease note that some data objects may not be viewable in the 3D or 2D Viewers When a data object is displayed in a viewer it will appear as defined in the data object settings For more information on viewing and modifying data object settings please see Data Settingsli3il Layering Order in 2D Viewer L ayer ordering in 2D Viewer is determined by the sequence in which data objects are added to the viewer For example if two data objects completely overlap each other the data object added last will appear on top of the other You can bring layers to the top by using the Layer combo box located at the bottom of the 2D Viewer window The Layer combo box contains all of the layers currently displayed in the 2D Ta pe Viewer Select a layer from the combo box to bring it to the top of the layer order Working with Viewers 3D and 2D Viewers behave just like any other window For example you can Minimum 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Visualizing Data in 2D 3D 124 Maximize or Close the viewer by clicking the appropriate button in the top right corner of the viewer You can Resize the viewer by clicking and dragging the sides and corners of the viewer toa desired size or Move the viewer within the VMOD Flex main window by clicking the title bar and dragging it to a new location Select viewers aggeration 8 Av 3D Viewer 1 3DViewer 2 3D Views 3
200. lect the desired Surface data object from the Data Explorer and select the 2 button to insert the data object into the surface field e Click the Execute button to apply the operation Once the operation is applied you can confirm that the new Z values were created by viewing the table view for the selected well data object Please note that VMOD Flex will ignore wells where the elevation of the bottom of the well Zmin is greater than the calculated well head elevation 6 4 Style Settings VMOD Flex provides you with a wide variety of style settings allowing you to modify the appearance of data objects in both 3D and 2D Viewer The style settings can be accessed by 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services u VMOD Flex Help 6 4 1 expanding the Style node in the Settings tree shown below Please note that the Style node will only be available when the particular data object is being shown in 2D or 3D Viewer In general each data object has its own set of style settings although some settings are common between data objects The following sections describe the style settings for the various data objects lox E General 4 Operations fog Style General Labels M Appearance Colors Color Specified x C Symbol Circle 7 Size 2 fas fti Preview Select the links below to jump to the appropriate sections e Points Polylines Polygons 149 e Cross Sections h57 e Wells heo e Surface
201. ll eliminate the intersections When horizons are generated from these surfaces and each surface is set to Conformable the horizons are truncated such that each one conforms to the horizon above it as shown in the following image lf the middle horizon is set to Erosional with the top and bottom set to Conformable the topmost surface red is pushed up as shown in the following image 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 191 VMOD Flex Help _ View Structural Zones During the horizon creation process VMOD Flex automatically generates the structural zones between the defined horizons within the horizontal extent of the conceptual model boundary To view the generated structural zones in the Conceptual Model Tree expand the Structure Node and then expand the Zones node 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 192 Conceptual Model o 4 Conceptual Modell Structure i Horizons kf Horizont Horizon2 Horizon3 Horizon4 Horizon5 Horizon6 Zones are given a default name e g Zone1 Zone2 Zone3 etc which cannot be modified You can view the zones in an active 3D Viewer window by checking the empty check box neide the zone name For more information on data viewers please refer to Data Viewers 122 section 7 5 Defining Property Zones At this step define the flow property values for the geological formations 2012 by Schlumbe
202. lly define screen intervals pumping schedules observation points and well tops in the Wells Table See Well Tablehs for more information The final step in the Well import process is data validation VMOD Flex will validate the mapped data and highlights any rows that contain invalid data e g null values wrong assigned data type duplicate rows etc fl File Import Oj x Errors and warnings Heads Screens Pump Schedule There are 1 records with errors highlighted in red These records will not be imported Id PW already in the list I Do not import rows with warnings M Mapped Data Preview Heads Screens Pump Schedule Row x Y Well Id Elevation Bottom Warming status gt 1 574400 4863050 Pw 20 3 3 2 574622 4862900 Pw2 20 3 0 3 574680 4863050 Pw3 17 11 4 574700 4863209 Pwd 18 1 35 5 574710 4862849 39999949 Pw5 16 10 6 574555 4863111 Pw 20 3 3 el 574688 4862999 Pw 22 0 lad lt lt Previous Finish Cancel Help Please see Data Validation 7s1 section for more information on data validation Click the Next button to import the data Once imported a Wells data object will be added in the Data Explorer 3D Gridded Data 3D Gridded Data refers to 3D grids with attributes assigned to each grid cell 3D Gridded data can be used in VMOD Flex to visualize heads generated from a MODFLOW run in Visual MODFLOW or for assigning spat
203. lored using the color specified in the General node e By Attribute Shape is colored based on an attribute See Color By Attribute section for more information on color rendering e Custom Specify a color for the area fill This color will overwrite the default color defined in the general settings for this particular shape element Select the Transparent checkbox to make the polygon fill pattern transparent Use the adjacent Transparency text box to set the level of transparency e g a higher value will make the fill more transparent The Show in Cutaway check box allows you to show areas the polygon in cutaway regions in the 3D Viewer window When this option is disabled the polygon will not show in any areas that have been hidden in the 3D Viewer window by creating Cutaways For information on creating cutaways please see Creating Cutaways her Lines General Operations Style Lines M Show Lines Labels Colors Color 3 Vertices Specified 0 E Type il Width 1 Preview 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 155 VMOD Flex Help Select the Color method line Pattern solid or dash line Width from the appropriate combo boxes Choose from the following color methods e Specified Line is colored using the color specified in the General settings e Custom Specify a color for the line element This color will overwrite the default colo
204. lp 7 6 1 Deleting Boundary Conditions To delete a boundary condition follow the steps below From the Conceptual Model tree right click on the desired boundary condition and select Delete from the pop up menu You will prompted with a confirmation message Click the Yes button to delete the boundary condition Note Please be aware that there is no undo function to recover a deleted boundary condition Please exercise caution when deleting boundary condition Define Boundary Conditions Lines Polygons 9 Before You Start Make sure you have imported or created all the data objects that you want to use for Defining Boundary Conditions Refer to the Collect Data Objects 179 step Define Geometry The first step involves selecting the boundary condition type and specifying the location of the boundary condition on the simulation domain e From the Select Boundary Condition Type combo box select the desired boundary condition type For more information on each boundary condition type including the data requirements for MODFLOW please see Boundary Conditions Overview e Enter a Name and a Description optional for the boundary condition The specified name will appear in the Conceptual Model tree once the boundary condition is created Next select where to apply the boundary condition on the simulation domain by selecting an option from the Where to apply on the Simulation Model Domain combo box The type of options
205. main This will ensure the model has the minimum data required to run a simulation However in most situations the flow and transport properties will not be uniform throughout the entire model domain and it will be necessary to assign different property values to different areas of the model Heterogeneous model property values are supported by Visual MODFLOW using either Constant Value Property Zones or Distributed Value Property Zones These two different approaches are described below Constant Value Property Zones The Constant Value Property Zones approach is the most simple and straight forward and can be used for all model properties supported by Visual MODFLOW Different model 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 268 properties are accommodated by grouping grid cells sharing the same property values into property zones Each property zone will normally contain a unique set of property values and is represented by a different grid cell color The Constant Value Property Zones approach requires the development of a conceptual model whereby each hydrostratigraphic unit of the model is assigned a uniform set of property values For example consider an aquifer where there is pumping test data and slug test data indicating a range of horizontal conductivity values from 1x10 4 cm s to 5x10 4 cm s at different locations within the aquifer The conceptual approach would assign a uniform Kx and
206. menu Then in the Settings dialog expand the Style node to view the style settings Colors l Operations General Style Colors Contour Line M Select Data IM Show Color Fill Attribute Max HHHH Min HHHH M Color Template Category Elevation a M Classification Type Classes Stretched Number of Classes 9 D C Classified C Equal Intervals fi Color _ 255 0 0 Dy 255 146 0 20 012925 E 227 255 3 19 4274875 Wy 118 255 15 18 84205 I 64 255 83 18 2566125 64 255 208 17 671175 B 40 149 246 17 0857375 E 8 8 255 16 5003 Max 21 18 Min 16 50 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 164 The Colors node provides options for coloring the surface layer by elevation value The following options are available Show Color Fill This option allows you to show or hide the color fill If disabled the surface will appear in the color defined in the General settings Transparency This option allows you to make the surface appear transparent When the Transparent checkbox is selected use the adjacent slider bar to set the level of transparency Type Select the type of gradient to use for coloring the surface Select Stretched to use a continuous color gradient or select Classified to use discrete color zones Classes There are two options for defining the number of classe
207. mp 3D Column View 0000005 Toolbox Layer View Row View Model Explorer 3 Wells Boundary Condition rid uts Properties Flow Conductivity Storage InitialHeads dary Conditions fecharge S g 5 D vapotranspiration onstant Heads Constant Head 1 Rivers River 0 River 1 Pumping Wells z Pumping Wells Boundary Co Zone Budget Particles Forward Particles Backward Particles Flow Observation Wells om Layer 1 Row 19 Column 1 X 7 29 Y 815 77 Atrribute nuts DRUMCO grid Run The numerical grid will appear as a node in the model tree as highlighted in red You can right click on this item in the tree and select Settings In addition the Numerical Grid can be added to a stand alone 3D view to do this right click and select 3D Viewer 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 263 VMOD Flex Help a AIRPORT2 REVISED 5 Simulation Domain o F pagpa Domain i J E puts GL Properties i 5 0 Row bo Bw al InitialHeads 5 ro Boundary Conditions E Constant Heads H CJ Rivers C Recharges ch Pumping Wells 7 Particles Outputs i V Heads ST Forward Pathlines The numerical grid can be exported to s
208. mum change in the solution is below a set convergence tolerance set here in the working units of feet or metres then the solution has converged and the solver stops otherwise a new iteration is started A solution accurate to 0 01 ft or m will normally be sufficient for most problems unless the maximum head change throughout 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 289 VMOD Flex Help the modeled domain is smaller than one foot or metre If an appropriate mass balance is not achieved and the maximum number of iterations is not reached this value can be decreased by an order of magnitude e Printout Interval Default 10 The printout interval is the number of iterations after which the maximum head change and residual of the solution is written to the listing LST file e User Seed Value Default 0 01 There are two options either the user can enter the seed or the seed will be calculated at the start of the simulation from problem parameters The iteration parameter seed is used as a basis for determining the sequence of w values The w multiplies each term on the right side of the equation and must be cycled through a series of values in successive iterations to achieve satisfactory rates of convergence The more strongly diagonal the coefficient matrix the less important the choice of seed will be 10 10 1 4 5 SOR Slice Successive Over Relaxation is a method for solving large systems of linear equations iterati
209. n e Once the points data objects are created they will be added to the Data Explorer where they can be used to create surface layers 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings Converting Well Tops to Points Data Object For Wells data objects only This operation allows you to create a new points data object for each well top formation in a wells data object The resulting points data objects can then be used to create surfaces which can be used to define the horizons of a conceptual model Well top data can either be included during data import or they can be manually defined in the well table view For information on defining well tops please see Adding Well Tops section To access this operation right click on the desired wells data object in the Data Explorer and select Settings from the pop up menu In the Settings dialog select the Operations node and a window similar to the one shown below will display H Settings General Operations Operations Select Operation Convert well tops to points data objects Description and Instructions Create a new XYZ points data object for each formation The points can then be interpolated to create surfaces Input Parameters _ Parameter Value I Save As New Data Object Execute To create new points data objects from well top formation follow the steps below e Select the Convert well tops to points data objects op
210. nd click the Next button e After the parent grid has been defined right click on the numerical grid from the Conceptual Model tree and select Create Child Grid Horizontal Grid Refinement Horizontal child grid refinement involves specifying the location of the child grid within the parent grid and defining the row and column refinement ratio Define Numerical Grid Name Childgrid1 Define Horizontal Grid Refinement Ratio 3 1 Preview Row Refinement j Column Refinement Start Start 10 a 10 End End 15 ise il Previous Next gt gt Cancel Tip You can add data objects e g boundaries wells site maps from the data explorer to the 2D Viewer preview to assist you in determining the placement of the child grid within the parent grid Select the desired data objects from the data explorer and the data will be displayed in the 2D Viewer preview Enter a unique name for the child grid in the Name field Next select the refinement ratio from the Ratio combo box A ratio of 3 1 for example will refine the parent cell by a factor of three resulting in nine horizontal child cells within one parent cell Finally specify the Row Refinement interval and the Column Refinement interval by selecting the starting row column and ending row column for where the grid refinement should be applied within the parent grid The child grid can be placed anywhere within the parent grid as long as it does not overlap anot
211. nd the complexity of the conceptual model inputs 7 B9 NumericalGridi Numerical Model Converting conceptual model to numerical model i Conceptual model to numerical mode conversion has completed 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials o e When the conversion is complete click Next Step to proceed to the Properties step View Edit Properties e Atthis step you can view edit the flow properties for the model Eea e Under Views select the various views you want to see in the Flex viewer VMOD Flex allows you to simultaneously show a layer row column and 3D Views Place a checkbox beside the desired view and it will appear on screen e Adjust a specific layer row or column using the up down arrows Alternatively click on the button then click on any specific row column or layer in any of the 2D views and the selected row column or layer will be set automatically e Now you will define a default initial heads value e Choose Initial Heads from the combo box under the Toolbox as shown below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help Views v Layer 1 gt A Row 1 Column 1 amp 3D Initial Heads Database Edit e Click Database button located below the Initial Heads combo box e Type 350 for each of the zone values this will apply an initial head value of 350 for t
212. nd thus help convergence Cleary and others 2000 In these cases the parameter ICG can be set to 1 to perform conjugate gradient iterations at the end of each multigrid cycle Activating this option can decrease execution times for some problems but it will also increase the amount of memory used by the solver e The Print Flag OUTAMG frame allows you to select between various print options e CONTROL Parameter Default 2 e 1 reuse of the setup phase is not used e 2 reuse of the setup phase will be used Recommended e 3 reuse of the setup phase will be used and SSC will be used 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 293 VMOD Flex Help 10 10 1 5 Recharge and Evapotranspiration Translate Translate General 4 General Settings Recharge options NRCHOP Recharge is only applied to the uppermost active layer NRCHOP 3 MODFLOW 2005 Evapotrenspiration options NEVTOP EVT is only applied to the uppermost active layer NEVTOP 3 Settings Time Steps Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Output Control MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format Recharge options NRCHOP NRCHOP is the recharge option code Recharge The Recharge zone distribution can be applied to any of the user specified model Layers If the recharge is assigned to the top grid layer and some cells in the top layer become dry during the course of the simulation or if some cells in the top layer
213. ndary Cai ER Budget Particles Forward Particles C Backward Particles Flow Observation Wells m DRUMCO grid Run 10 12 1 Contours and Color Floods Click the View Maps button 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 312 a x demo rl Ea x a9 Fie Tools Window Help Workflow x D H om O Bl E Data 4 a B drumco Elevation 1 5 EJ Define Modeling Objectives drumco Elevation 2 Define Numerical Model View Maps amp drumco Elevation 3 Create Grid Vi i J drumco Elevation 4 EJ Import Model biting a HB drumco Elevation 5 View Edt Grid 7 Layer P P D Gaggeration 10 S virtual grid Virtual grid size 50 21 Wireframe B crumco Elevation 6 Define Properties 1 ie VMod imported Wells Define Boundary Conditions _ Layer View 3D View Select the Next Step Row WW Define Observation Zones 50 jw E Define Observation Wells a MW Define Zone Budget Zones Column WW Define Particles S E Select Run Type asd S I PEST Run 7 2D E Single Run Translate R
214. nditionWizardForm Polplines Zones Points Haec aj PLine0 Zonel PLinel Zone13 PLine1 Select how the attributes are defined PLine2 PLine3 PLine4 PLine5 PLine6 PLine PLine8 xl Define for the entire zone C Define values at vertices Linear Interpolation M Use default leakance Riverbed Stage Bottom Leakance MRA Static kal fStatig v Lette Calculatec Constant Ml Constan lt Previous Finish Cancel Help Attribute data can be defined for each zone in the boundary condition geometry polygon or polyline Simply select the feature for which attributes are to be defined from the Feature List select a zone from the Zone list and then define the attribute data in the Data Entry Grid Repeat this process for other features zones in the selected data object Note The selected zone will be highlighted yellow in the adjacent 2D Viewer preview If attribute data is not defined for certain zones these parts of the boundary condition will not be included during translation For polylines only it is possible to define attributes at line vertices In this case the Points List will become available where you can select the vertices that comprise the selected zone For more information on assigning attributes to points see Select the Method for Defining Attributes Polylines Only section For each attribute in the Data Input Grid there are two combo boxes
215. ne data object to define the geometry of the boundary condition the next step is defining zones for the selected polyline This procedure is described in the following section 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 206 Define Attributes VMOD Flex provides various methods for assigning parameter values to boundary conditions Each parameter in the boundary condition can be set to Constant or Transient and values can be assigned using attributes from various imported data objects The available methods for assigning attributes include Parameter values must be entered in the units defined in the project settings To read more about the project settings please see Units section in the project settings Once the geometry has been defined see previous sections the next step is to define the boundary condition parameters Although each boundary condition type requires a different set of parameters the data input windows each have similar features and functionality For information on required parameters for each boundary condition please see the appropriate heading under Boundary Conditions Overview section A typical boundary condition data input window is shown below Options for defining attributes BoundaryConditionWizardForm Feature List p fetes Zone List Select how the attibutes are defined Define for the entre zone Define values at vertices Linear Inter
216. near interpolation provides results that are more smooth and may anticipate the peak and valleys between data Singularities and other undesirable effects may be lessened by incorporating the gradient factor The gradient influence on the results can be manipulated by two tautness parameters that you can enter These parameters allow the interpolated surface to vary from purely linear interpolation to one which is well rounded and has a gradient factor In all cases the slope discontinuities are removed and the resulting surface has slope continuity everywhere 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 118 Defining an Interpolation Domain using a Polygon When creating a surface the interpolation domain is automatically calculated from the X and Y extents of the specified point s data set There may be times when you do not want to use the entire points data set to generate a surface In this case you can manually define the interpolation domain Xmax Ymax Xmin Ymin by specifying new values in the interpolation settings grid or you can use an imported or digitized polygon data object To define the interpolation domain using a polygon data object follow the steps below In the Create Surface dialog box select the Use a polygon extent check box Select a polygon data object from the Data Explorer and then click the button E Interpolation Domain x Max 574438 89028680592 Y Max 4863746 207869472 x M
217. ng is necessary and DAMP should be set equal to 1 0 For non linear problems restricting the head change DAMP lt 1 0 may be necessary to achieve convergence and values of DAMP between 0 5 and 1 0 are generally sufficient For some nonlinear problems imposing a fixed value of DAMP for every iteration can hinder convergence One remedy for this condition is to adjust the amount of damping depending on how the head solution progresses The AMG Package provides two adaptive damping strategies 1 Cooley s method with Huyakorn s modification and 2 the relative reduced residual method These methods are described in detail in the U S Geological Open File Report 01 177 ADAMP value of 1 will utilize the first method and a DAMP value of 2 will utilize the second method Max Damping Factor DUP Default 1 The upper limit for DAMP when an adaptive damping strategy is used Min Damping Factor DLOW Default 0 2 The lower limit for DAMP when an adaptive damping strategy is used Head Change Convergence Criterion HCLOSE similar as described for previous solvers Perform Conjugate Gradient Iterations ICG Default checked In some cases AMG can perform poorly as a result of a small number of error components that are not reduced during the AMG cycling A few iterations of a conjugate gradient solver can 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 292 often reduce these error components a
218. ng the zones into proportionately thick layers Braggerate 39 A The options available for defining slice elevations are similar to those for defining slice elevations for finite difference grids For information on these settings e g grid types min layer thickness and layer refinement please refer to Defining the Vertical Gridle31I Once the vertical mesh settings have been defined click the Finish button to generate the finite element mesh The finite element mesh will now appear in the Conceptual Model tree under the Model Domain node as shown below where it can be displayed in a 2D or 3D Viewer window and used in Translation to Finite Element Modelbsa 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 247 VMOD Flex Help 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models zs 9 Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models VMOD Flex allows you to translate your conceptual model to multiple finite difference models for running and analyzing in VMOD Flex or to one or more finite element models for running in FEFLOW During translation VMOD Flex automatically populates the specified grid or mesh with the defined geological formations boundary conditions and property zone attributes and creates the necessary input files for loading into your desired simulator For MODFLOW finite difference models a numerical modeling workflow ksa wil
219. ngs of either the 2D or 3D views can be adjusted First make the desired property group selected and visible in the Flex Viewer Make the desired 2D viewer active Then right click on the desired property group in the tree as shown below and select Settings 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 267 VMOD Flex Help 5 AIRPORT TRANSIENT arid z C Run SE rous i a O Properties t O Flow pe C Storage i C Initial Hi Composite View C Boundary Cond Delete i jee C Recharge Da Evepotane Export H 3D Viewer C Rivers i C River 0 Expand to selection Coat a eer Expand all child nodes 5 Particles Collapse all i 1 Cae The 2D Colors and Contour line settings can be adjusted For more details see Color and Contour settings he3 Export Properties Any of the model properties can be exported to shapefile see Exporth20 for more details 10 4 1 Theory The following sections present an overview of the property zone parameters required for flow models in VMOD Flex A flow model requires Conductivity Storage and Initial Heads property values for each active grid cell in order to run a flow simulation Similarly a transport model requires transport parameter values for each active grid cell in order to run a transport simulation Upon creating a Visual MODFLOW project the default flow and transport parameter values are assigned to every grid cell in the model do
220. nputs Outputs 5 C Uniform Grid 100 100 40 layers Outputs The tree structure for multiple model runs is shown below Each numerical grid which is derived from a conceptual model can have one or more model Runs each model run contains the inputs and output for a single numerical model Deformed Grid 100 100 Inputs dose _ Outputs a Run4 4 F Inputs Ha 2 Outputs C LGR Child Grid Around Wellfield Run3 Inputs i E Outputs C Uniform Grid 100 100 40 layers l Run E Inputs i B Outputs Closing Minimizing Workflow Windows You can close a workflow window at anytime by selecting the X button in the top right however this is only recommended if you do not need the workflow window until a later time 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Multiple Model Scenarios 326 for example a specific model run How To Reload a Closed Workflow You can reload a workflow window at any time by right clicking on the appropriate node in the model explorer To reload a Conceptual Model workflow right click on the Conceptual Model node in the model tree and select Open Related Workflows al Delete Translate to Finite Element Model Open Related Workflow s Expand to selection Expand all child nodes Collapse all To reload a Numerical Model workflow right click on the desired Run n
221. nputs and outputs to shapefiles for external analysis Points Polygons and Polylines can be exported to SHP CSV Surfaces Horizons exported to CSV 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 321 VMOD Flex Help To export a data object e From the Data Explorer right click on the desired data object and select Export from the pop up menu e A Save As dialog box will display on your screen e Specify a file Name and Folder location and the File Type for the exported file and then click the Save button Click the OK button from the Export dialog box Export to points or polygon shapefile is currently available for the following e Numerical Grid e Properties Conductivity Storativity Initial Heads e Boundaries All types including wells e Heads e Drawdown To export right click on the desired item on the model explorer eg Conductivity and select Export as shown below 5 E Run Inputs 6 0 Aow i M Aheanvstinn z C Backward Particles Z AIRPORT TRANSIENT grid Settings Composite View Delete 3D Viewer Expand to selection Expand all child nodes Collapse all Walle The following dialog will appear note at the bottom you have the option to choose Points Shapefile or Polygon Shapefile format 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 322 e Save As T gt Computer gt
222. nt may alternate between confined and unconfined values Vertical leakage from above is limited if the aquifer becomes desaturated The LAYAVG value determines the method of computing interblock transmissivity Following are the five methods used in assigning the LAYAVG value e 0 Harmonic mean interblock transmissivity Default setting for MODFLOW 96 and MODFLOW 2000 e 10 Arithmetic mean interblock transmissivity e 20 Logarithmic mean interblock transmissivity e 30 Arithmetic mean saturated thickness times logarithmic mean hydraulic conductivity e 40 Harmonic mean interblock hydraulic conductivity introduced in BCF4 package Default Required setting for MODFLOW SURFACT Note that the LAYAVG values are two digits with a factor of ten For example a LAYCON value of 21 represents an unconfined layer where the interblock transmissivity is calculated using a logarithmic mean The Layer column in the Layer Settings window see following figure is the layer number which is automatically numbered as one row for each layer of the model grid The LAYCON column is the Input LAYCON value which includes the first digit tens stored as the LAYAVG value Interblock transmissivity and the second digit ones stored as the LAYCON value Layer type Thus the one Input LAYCON value holds the identification for each layer of the model grid The Interblock transmissivity column displays the LAYAVG value and descriptive name associat
223. o Polygons Polylines Points and Maps only When the Arithmetic node is selected from the Settings tree the following dialog will display To apply an arithmetic operation follow the steps below e Select the desired arithmetic expression from the Select Operation combo box e f you are unsure of what the expression does refer to the provided description in the Description and Instructions text box e The contents of the Input Parameters frame will vary depending on the selected expression e f the selected expression contains a constant value e g Z Constant enter a value in Value field e If the selected expression requires a surface e g Z Surface x y then select the desired surface from the Data Explorer and then click the button to insert the surface into the Value field e Optional Select the Save As New Data Object check box to save the transformed data as a new data object e Click the Execute button to apply the operation Note If the data object is being viewed in a 3D Viewer while the operation is applied you may have to turn off the data object and then turn it back on to see the changes Attribute Operations Modify an Attribute using a Constant Value For time schedule data objects VMOD Flex allows you to modify attribute values using a specified constant value For example the constant value can be set equal to added to subtracted from and multiplied by the existing attribute values
224. o use this option right click on the Run node on the model tree and select Clone When this option is selected the model run tree in the model explorer will be duplicated and a new workflow window will appear e When you are within the Conceptual Model workflow upon running the Conceptual to Numerical Modelle48l conversion Each new workflow will load as a separate window inside the VMODFlex main application window The windows can be accessed from the workflow toolbar at the bottom of the screen as highlighted below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 325 VMOD Flex Help a File Tools Window Help Workflow A PEALII QOR Data O ay Convert conceptual model to nun y fi 5 E E A Inspect Define Properties D ground Define Boundary Conditions Vi DO boundary Select the Next Step mre cle OG const head OTe V Layer XP PRO OO lakes oR 1 amp OO general head H O Ver Layar View Row n E Column Fj 3D Toolbox Conductivity Zones Model Explorer l Datab S E Conceptual Model 1 ard C Model Boundary Structure 5 C Horizons C Horizont Legend E a Color Zones C Horizon S E Zones 1 2 E Zone1 E Zone2 5 Properties S E Simulation Domain 5 H Mode Domain C Boundary Conditions i C NumericalGrid1 C Deformed Grid 100 100 Ba Run2 H E Inputs E Outputs Run4 E Inputs E Outputs 5 C LGR Child Grid Around Welfield S A Run3 c E I
225. o a target field select the corresponding source field from the drop list box in the Map_to column The drop down list displays the column headers in the data source file i mM Data Mapping Target_ fields Map_to Unit category Unit Multiplier Data type Length Length Numeric Numeric Numeric 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data For example in the figure above the elevation field in the source data is labeled Z To map this field to the target field Elevation select Z from the adjacent drop down list Source fields that are not required can be mapped by creating a new attribute To create a new attribute click the Add a new attribute button A new row will be added to the Data Mapping table RE Data Import 0 x D ata Mapping Target_ fields Unit category Length x zZ m Elevation Length gt Create a new attribute None vy None Y Unit Multiplier Data type Numeric Numeric Numeric ill Numeric EIEN Initial Heads bd In the Map_to column select the desired attribute field in the source data from the combo box Repeat for additional attributes You can delete a mapped attribute by selecting the row from the Data Mapping table and then clicking the x Delete button Use the Unit Category and Unit columns to define the units
226. objects VMOD Flex allows you to have multiple viewers opened and displayed simultaneously Both viewers can be launched by clicking on Window from the main menu and then selecting New 2D Window or New 3D Window Expand the following sections to learn more about each topic See Also Exportls2dl for details on exporting data from a viewer e Exporting 2D 3D Views to imagelisol Opening a New 2D or 3D Viewer There are two ways in which you can launch a 2D or 3D Viewer in VMOD Flex From the Main Menu or from the Data Explorer e From the main menu select Window then either 2D or 3D Viewer e From the Data or Model Explorer right click on a data object and select 2D Viewer or 3D Viewer from the pop up menu A new viewer will then launch displaying the selected data object Please note that the viewers listed in the pop up menu depend on which data object is selected see table under Displaying Data in Viewers h2 Adding Data Objects to Viewers 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 123 VMOD Flex Help Input To display data in a viewer select the check box beside the data object in the Data Explorer or Conceptual Model Explorer If multiple viewers are opened the data will be shown in ed Sif M a aaea Ss aa the active viewer Point F ere points To remove data from a viewer select Wells the check box beside the data object ie MAY wells so that it appears empty or unchecked P
227. oceed Convert to Numerical Model Now you are ready to populate the numerical grid mesh with the conceptual elements e Click on the Convert to Numerical Model button to proceed 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help a File Tools Window Help Workflow ua ad x A 00m amp Data DA ground Define Modeling Objectives DE layer2top Collect Data Objects Select Grid ayer2bottom Define Conceptual Model NumericalGrid1 OO boundary Define Model Structure OG chdeast Define Property Zones OG chd west H E Select the Next Step OG rivers Select Grid Type Jl View Finite Element Mesh View Finite Difference Grid Tra jel of Z Convert To Numerical Model Explorer E Conceptual Model 1 C Model Boundary i Structure EL Horizons C Horizont HO Horizon io LO Horizon3 S E Zones Zone1 L Zone2 Properties E Conductivity I Property Zone 1 L IE Propetty Zone 2 Simulation Domain Bl Model Domain Hy Boundary Conditions C Constant Head 1 i C Constant Head West F NumericalGridt Conceptual Model 30 Viewer 1 e After clicking on the conversion button a new window will appear which includes the steps for the numerical model In the first window you will see the progress of the conceptual to numerical conversion This conversion could take several minutes depending on the size and type of grid you used a
228. ode Domain Te Boundary Conditions i bu C Pumping Wells Boundary Condition FO Specified Head 1 GAE DRUMCO orid The Model Boundary node allows you to show hide the conceptual model boundary in a 2D or 3D Viewer The Structure folder allows you to define the horizons and structural zones of the conceptual model For more information on structural modeling please see Defining the Structurels4 The Properties node allows you to define property zones for the conceptual model For more information on property modeling please see Defining Property Zones 1s2 7 4 Defining the Structure At this step provide the geological surfaces that will represents the tops and bottoms of the geological model 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 185 VMOD Flex Help gr W Flex Example C TEA E S b e ranae eG File Tools Window Help Workflow 8x D H Ea E Data amp ground Ej Define Modeling Objectives amp layer2top Collect Data Objects Define Conceptual Model Structure layer2 bottom Define Conceptual Model 5 Om 5 S SH fFe ces MIO boundary Define Model Structure 7 chd east e Property Zone chd west f ivers Horizon Infomation Surfaces Name Type 00000 Model Explorer EM Conceptual Mode 1 BE 5 Conceptual Model 2 Model Boundary Exaggeration 1 S Structure Horizons Zones C Properties Simulation
229. ode in the model explorer and select Open Related Workflow S AIRPORT TRANSIENT E i Open Related Workflow s G 7 Clone T Settings E Delete i Expand to selection Expand all child nodes Collapse all 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 327 VMOD Flex Help 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services References 328 12 References Online Guides to USGS MODFLOW and associated packages MODFLOW 2005 http water usgs gov nrp gwsoftware modflow2005 Guide index html MODFLOW LGR _http water usgs gov nrp qwsoftware modflow2005_Igqr Guide index html MODFLOW 2000 http water usgs gov nrp gwsoftware modflow2000 Guide index htm 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Index 3D Record to AVI File 127 3D Viewer Performance Preferences 13 A About the Import Process 71 sC Constant Head 215 Cross Sections Ploton Color Map 170 D Define Observation Wells 274 F Export views toimage 130 aF Flow Properties Edit Colors 266 Edit Contours 266 H How to buy 4 Import Data 71 Maps 99 Points 71 Surfaces 83 Wells 85 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services N Numerical Grid Edit 56 View 56 Numerical Properties Edit 40 View 40 O OpenGL Driver Settings 14 P Project Color Palette 15 Pumping Wells 215
230. odeling Workflow 282 Translate Translate General 4 General Settings Selected Solver Conjugate Gradient Solver PCG MODFLOW 2005 Settings Time Steps Solvers 4 PCG Settings Recharge and EVT Max outer iteration MXITER 50 Lake Max inner iteration ITER1 25 Layers Head change criterion HCLOSE 0 01 Rewetting Residual criterion RCLOSE 0 01 Initial Heads Damping factor DAMP DUMPPCG 1 Anisotropy Damping factor for transient stress period DUMF 1 Output Control Relaxation parameter RELAX 1 MODPATH The printout interval IPRPCG 10 Discharge Options Pre conditioning method NPCOND Modified Incomplete Cholesky NPCONG 1 Time Format Estimate of the upper bound NBPOL Calculate esimate Convergence output control MUTPCG Print only the number of iterations MUTPCG 1 Max outer iteration MXITER Max outer iteration e Preconditioned Conjugate Gradient Package PCG2 ke2 e Strongly Implicit Procedure Package SIP zeal e Slice Successive Overrelaxation Package SOR kesl e WHS Solver for VMOD Flex WHS esel e Geometric Multigrid Solver GMG bsi e Algebraic Multigrid Methods for Systems SAMG 9A and Algebraic Multigrid Solver AMG only available with MODFLOW 2000 2005 and MODFLOW LGR These solvers and their individual settings can be accessed by selecting MODFLOW Solver from the Run section of VMOD Flex A Solver Setting window will appear similar to the image shown in the following figure wi
231. of a mapped field If the specified units are different than those defined in the Project Settings VMOD Flex will automatically convert the data in the source file to the default project units The Multiplier column allows you to multiply all values in the mapped field by a specified multiplier value The Data Type column allows you to define the data type Select from the following options Numeric Text Boolean Date and Time For example if the mapped column contains text data select Text from the drop down list Once the data mapping is complete click the Next button to continue to the validation dialog Data Validation The final step involves validation of the data being imported This step will ensure that the data set contains valid data for each of the mapped fields 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help 3 Data Import E lol xl There are 1 records with errors highlighted in red These records will not be imported Source Kx ft day contains ilegal numeric value IV Do not import rows with warnings M Mapped Data Preview 20 records were mapped Show only errors and warnings Show this amount 190 Bop Row x aL Elevation Kx ft day lay2 i lay3 Errors lay4 lt Back Einish Cancel Help In the top half of the dialog VMOD Flex will list any mapped fields that contain invalid data along with a reason for why they are deemed invalid The data val
232. ometry or else the data object cannot be used Use Time Schedule Transient Only This method allows you to use a time schedule data object for defining the stress periods and values of a transient attribute When this method is selected click the Use Time Schedule button to launch the Time Schedule dialog e From the Data Explorer select the desired time schedule data object e Click the 3 button to insert it into the Select Time Schedule Object field e Once selected the data objects attributes are listed in the combo box below e Select the desired attribute value from the combo box and then click the OK button to close the dialog box Use Default Leakance 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 211 VMOD Flex Help The Use Default Leakance option is used to calculated the leakance value for River Drain Lake and General Head boundary conditions using a mathematical expression containing array variables See the section Using Mathematical Formulas and Array Variables in the VMOD Flex User s Manual for more information If the Use Default Leakance option is selected the leakance value will be calculated using a default formula associated with each boundary condition type If this option is not selected a leakance value will need to be entered manually The advantage of using the default leakance formula to calculate the leakance value for the group of grid cells is that each grid cell will be assigned a leakance value
233. on e mii LT layers by dividing the zones into proportionately thick layers Zmin 184 170855920891 Min Cell Thickness Zmax 0 1 363 466310940812 Layer Name Layer Refinement aT Zone2 1 Apply Exaggeration 0 H Row 1 Column 1 lt lt Back Finish Cancel The first step in defining the vertical grid is selecting the Grid Type There are three different grid types Deformed Uniform and Deformed Uniform Each grid type is described in the following sections Grid Types Deformed In a deformed grid the tops and bottoms of the model layers conform to the horizons elevation You can refine the model layers by diving the structural zones into proportionately thick layers 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 233 VMOD Flex Help N ll 57 I 43 29 4 22 118 214 Cross sectional view of deformed grid from Visual MODFLOW Flex A Minimum Cell Thickness must be specified as MODFLOW does not permit lateral discontinuity of layers i e a layer cannot have a thickness of 0 at any point in the layer When horizons are on lapping one another resulting in a zero cell thickness the minimum cell thickness is applied and the horizons are shifted based on the horizon types defined in the Horizon settings See Horizon Typeshesr section For deformed grids you have the option of refining Subdividing each layer into a specified number of equally thick layers In the tab
234. one based Specified Flux Streams Light blue Wells Light red Editing Well Attributes To delete well attributes right click on the original wells data object and select the Spreadsheet option The options for editing are explained in the Edit Well Attributes h37 section Exporting Boundary Conditions The boundary condition cell locations and attributes be exported to shapefile see Exportlszo for more details Adjusting Style Settings The style settings of some of the Boundary condition cells Right click on the desired Boundary condition cell group from the model tree and select Settings The Settings dialog will appear the settings are similar to described in Points 1491 DefineBC_Theory Steady State vs Transient Flow Boundary Conditions For transient simulations MODFLOW requires the time element of the boundary conditions to be defined using Stress Period counters as opposed to using real times As a result each time interval for a transient model must be determined in terms of Stress Periods before any boundary condition data is defined Unfortunately accommodating this format is quite tedious because the data collected for rainfall and groundwater recharge doesn t always follow the same time schedules as data collected for other boundary conditions like well pumping rates and surface water levels This approach also makes it difficult to utilize raw field data collected and recorded in terms of real t
235. ons is less than the maximum this value can be decreased by an order of magnitude e Printout Interval Default 10 The printout interval is the number of iterations after which the maximum head change and residual of the solution is written to the listing LST file 10 10 1 4 6 SAMG Visual MODFLOW supports the Algebraic Multigrid Methods for Systems Solver SAMG Package developed by the Fraunhofer Institute for Algorithms and Scientific Computing FhG SCAI Please note that the SAMG solver is only available with the MODFLOW 2000 2005 and LGR flow engine The Algebraic Multigrid AMG Package solver may be obtained from the Fraunhofer Institute for Algorithms and Scientific Computing FnG SCAI for research purposes only Although most users will not have any difficulty running Visual MODFLOW with the AMG solver Schlumberger Water Services unfortunately cannot provide technical support for users who choose to manually add the AMG solver to their Visual MODFLOW software The SAMG solver package is a complete multi level framework designed to overcome the high memory requirements of previous AMG based solvers while maintaining the scalability and rapid execution times Testing of the SAMG solver vs the PCG2 solver using several models generated using Visual MODFLOW demonstrated solution times to be faster by a factor of between 2 4 and 11 3 The SAMG Package has some distinct advantages over other solvers available with MODFLOW for p
236. or transient flow simulations Translate Translate General 4 Time Format Settings Time Format Absolute time MODFLOW 2005 Stress Period Settings Time Step Time Steps Reletive Time Inside Step 0 lt t lt 1 Solvers Absolute Time Recharge and EVT Lake Layers Rewetting Initial Heads Anisotropy Settings Anisotropy By Layer Output Control MODPATH Discharge Options Time Format co 8 Time Format Time Format The Release Time s specified for the particles see Particle Release Time will be added to the Reference Time to determine the actual time of release for each particle There are two Time format options for setting the Reference time e Prd Stp Rel Tm Specify the Reference Time by entering the Stress Period Prd Time Step Stp and Relative time inside step Rel Tm e Absolute value Specify the reference time as an Absolute time from the beginning of the simulation Note For backward particle tracking in transient simulations the Reference Time cannot not be the beginning of the simulation because there are no simulation results before Time 0 i 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 309 VMOD Flex Help 10 11 e you cannot go backwards from zero Therefore when simulating backward particle tracking the Reference Time should be a time somewhere between the start and the end times of the transient simulation Run Numerical Engines One of the benefits of V
237. or transient simulations each grid cell may contain simulation results for each time step resulting in file that can become unnecessarily large By default the information is saved in the binary files at the end of each stress period and at the end of the simulation in the listing LST file The first two columns list the available stress periods and associated time steps for the entire simulation only one stress period and time step will be listed for steady state simulations The remaining columns indicate the information which can be written and saved to the various MODFLOW output files To select an output option click in the appropriate checkbox and a checkmark will appear to indicate that the selected information will be written for the selected time step The columns labeled Save to Binary will save the output information to the binary files as described below e Heads Saves the heads in the binary heads file HDS e DDown Saves the drawdown in the binary drawdown file DDN e F Term Saves the cell by cell flow terms in the binary budget BGT file Note The Zone Budget program uses the BGT file for calculating the flow between zones Therefore to change the frequency at which the Zone Budget information is saved select the desired F Term intervals The columns labeled Print to LST will save the output information to the listing file as described below e Heads Saves the heads in the listing file e DDown S
238. oundary conditions will describe the exchange of flow between the model and the external system e Specified Head e River e General Head e Drain e Recharge e Evapotranspiration e Lake e Specified Flux e Pumping Well The workflow for defining a pumping well boundary conditions is different than that of defining other boundary conditions such as recharge specified head river etc Please see the following section for information on defining pumping well boundary conditions For information on how to define all other types of boundary conditions please skip to Defining Other Boundary Conditions od section Defining Boundary Conditions In VMOD Flex the boundary condition types are separated into three categories e Boundary Conditions kosl standard Constant Head Rivers Drains General Head Recharge EVT etc e Pumping Wellsle12 Modifying Boundary Conditions From the Conceptual Model tree right click on the desired boundary condition and select Edit Boundary Condition from the pop up menu The Edit Boundary Condition dialog box will display on your screen allowing you modify the input parameters for the boundary condition For more information on defining parameter attributes please refer to Boundary Conditions Overview b14 section Once modifications have been made to the input parameters click the Finish button to save the changes 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 203 VMOD Flex He
239. our coordinate system and datum or leave the non cartesian as defaults e Define the Units frame For this project the default units will be fine The Create Project dialog should now look like this r Create Project Project Information Name Exercise Data Repository D Documents VMODFlex Description Project Coordinate Coordinate Systems Local Cartesian Datum World Geodetic System 1984 Units 24 4 Unit Settings Conductivity Length Pumping Rate Recharge Specific Storage Time Conductivity m s m 3 d mm yr 1 m day e Click OK The workflow selection screen will appear e Select Conceptual Modeling and the Conceptual Modeling workflow will load 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials Define Model Structure i Define Property Zones H O Select the Next Step Select Grid Type Translate to FEFLOW Model i _Convert to MODFLOW Model e In this step you define the objectives of your model and the default parameters _Visual MODFLOW Flex Example Conceptual Model ag File Tools Window Help Workflow x D H Bes OOF Data gt d bd d ka s Available Engines Infomation ae USGS MODFLOW 2000 from SWS USGS MODFLOW 2005 from SWS USGS MODFLOW LGR from SWS oo ZONEBUDGET MODPATH Simulation type Groundwater Flow gt Model Explorer
240. output time as you do this all active viewers layer row column 3D will refresh to show the heads for the new output time Wt me 1 26 2012 3 23 PM x wa al e The next section will discuss how you can generate a new grid with a different size and resolution and generate a numerical model using this grid Evaluating Different Grids Often the initial grid size you defined is not adequate to provide the solution and stability you 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services e VMOD Flex Help require from your model In this section we will explain how you can generate multiple grids from the conceptual model and run the corresponding numerical models e Below the windows near the bottom of your display you will see a list of active windows B 00 How C Storage jo h O InitialHeads O Boundary Conditions S 6 C Constant Heads C Constant Head 1 Ontimizatinn 4 i p Conceptual Model HumericalGrid1 Numerical Model e Click on the Conceptual Model button to make this the active window and it should now appear on your display e Click on Select Grid Type from the workflow tree e Click Define Finite Difference Grid button and the Define Grid window will appear e Define a new grid with the desired grid size and rotation e Click Next e Specify the desired vertical discretization you may wish to use a different vertical grid type or refine any of the vertical
241. p X Well1 Fill 6 5 Well1 Sand1 26 Well1 Clay 52 Well2 Fill 4 Well2 Sand1 17 Well2 Clay 94 Well Heads with Well Path 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 2 Fie import lox m Data Mapping Wellheads Path Source column Target field Fill Unit Category Units Multiplier Data Type x x Length m 1 Numeric Y Y Length m 1 Numeric ID None None none 1 Numeric IZ Elevation X Length m 1 Numeric x Y lt Create gt one M Source Data Preview lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Help This option is only available for deviated horizontal wells When this option is selected you must first map the well heads under the Well Heads tab see Well Heads Onlyls7N section Next click on the Path tab and map the appropriate column from the source data to the following target field e Elevation e X e Y e Well ID Please note well path data in your source file must be formatted as follows e Well ID X Y Elevation Well1 574506 3 4863299 36 100 Well1 574506 11 4863299 36 80 Well1 574506 60 4863298 36 68 e etc etc etc etc 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 93 VMOD Flex Help 4 1 6 Each row in the data represents a vertex in the well path When viewed in 3D Viewer VMOD Flex connects each vertex with a line allowing you to visualize the horizontal well path s Once the well path is imported you can manua
242. p a child grid It is recommended that you refine coarsen the parent grid before creating a child grid To edit the grid lines in a numerical grid follow the steps below From the Conceptual Model Tree right click on the Numerical Grid and select Edit from the pop up menu Horizontal Grid Refinement 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 236 The Grid Refinement dialog provides options for refining coarsening a numerical grid These options are described below 10x Define grid refinement Edit rows Edit columns Select editing options Refine in an interval v Settings Start End 1 1 Refine by 1 Apply Select a data object from the data explorer and add it to the viewer Add Help Cancel Tip You can add data objects e g boundaries wells site maps from the data explorer to the 2D Viewer preview to assist you in determining the areas in which horizontal refinement coarsening should be applied Select the desired data objects from the Data Explorer and the data will be displayed in the 2D Viewer preview Select the Edit Rows radio button to add remove grid lines rows along the Y direction of the numerical grid or select the Edit column radio button to add remove grid lines columns along the X direction of the numerical grid From the Select Editing Options combo box select either Refine in an interval or Coarsen in an interval Refining in an interval will a
243. package then uses linear interpolation to compute values of flow at each model time step For more information on the Specified Flow FHB1 package please refer to Documentation of a Computer Program FHB1 for Assignment of Transient Specified Flow and Specified Head Boundaries in Applications of the Modular Finite Difference Ground W ater Flow Model MODFLOW Open File Report 97 571 U S Geological Survey Required Data The specified flux package requires the following input parameters e Starting Flux L3 T e Ending Flux L3 T Supported Geometry The geometry for Specified Flux boundary conditions can be specified using polygon or polyline data objects 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes zs 8 Defining Grids Meshes At this step you can create finite difference grids for MODFLOW or finite element meshes for a FEFLOW run File Tools Window Help Workflow AR P D G Hlo s 6 OF amp Data A DA gound Define Modeling Objectives Select the Grid Type DE layer2top Collect Data Objects DA layer2bottom EJ Define Conceptual Model MO boundary EJ Define Model Structure OG chdeast EJ Define Property Zones OG chd west OG ives Iy Conceptual Model 1 Model Boundary i Structure S C Horizons C Horizont C Horizon2 C Horizon3 5 C Zones O Zone1 C Zone2 S E Properties S E Conductivity C Propetty Zone 1 Property Zone 2 Simulation Domain 5 C Model Domain E
244. per call to the solver For most problems convergence for each iteration is achieved in less than 50 cycles so that generally MXCYC can be less than 50 For highly nonlinear problems however better performance may be achieved by limiting the solver to a small number of cycles and increasing the maximum number of iterations MXITER This prevents the solver from needlessly finding very accurate solutions at early iterations of these highly nonlinear problems Residual Convergence Criterion RCLOSE for the inner iteration Typically RCLOSE is set to the same value as HCLOSE If RCLOSE is set too high then additional outer iterations may be required due to the linear equation not being solved with sufficient accuracy Likewise a too restrictive setting for RCLOSE for nonlinear problems may force an unnecessarily accurate linear solution This may be alleviated with the MKC YC parameter or with damping Note In the new SAMG package RCLOSE and HCLOSE replace BCLOSE Damping Factor DAMP Default 1 The damping factor can be used to restrict the head change from one iteration to the next which commonly is useful in very nonlinear problems DAMP makes the solution change slowly thus avoiding spurious deviations prompted by nonlinear effects at intermediate solutions Values of DAMP less than 1 0 restrict the head change under relaxation while values greater than 1 0 accelerate the head change over relaxation For linear problems no dampi
245. perty Zones and Boundary Conditions e Numerical Model Data Objects These are generated as you progress through a numerical modeling workflow and include e Input Numerical Grid Properties Conductivity Initial Heads etc Boundary Conditions a group of river cells drain cells pumping well cells etc Observation Wells Zone Budget zones and Particles e Output Calculated Heads Drawdown Pathlines etc Each data object will have a check box beside it allowing it to be displayed in different 2D 3D viewers Each data object also has Settings which can be accessed by right clicking on the data object in the tree and selecting Settings The settings provide access to general properties statistics file origin etc and Style settings symbol colors shape labeling etc For more details see Data Settings hsi Many wizards and dialog boxes in VMOD Flex require you to select data objects from the Data Explorer or Conceptual Model Explorer e g when defining horizons creating property zones and assigning attributes to boundary conditions When you see a Blue Arrow 3 located next to an input field in a dialog box or a wizard this means that a data object selection is required Simply click the appropriate data object from the Data Explorer or Conceptual Model Explorer and then click the Blue Arrow button to insert the data object into the input field Model Explorers The Model explorers contain all of the concept
246. polation 2D Viewer Points List Vertices Data Input Grid B o T lt Previous Finish Cancel Help Select the Method for Defining Attributes Polylines Only For polylines there are two ways in which you can assign attributes to the boundary condition geometry e Define for the entire zone default This option allows you to assign boundary condition data to the entire zone e Define values at vertices This option allows you to assign boundary condition data to the vertices along the zone line and then during translation linear interpolation is used to determine the parameters for the cells that fall between the specified vertices With this method there are two options Define Start and End Points This option allows you to define the attribute value only at the first and last vertex of a zone All Vertices This option allows you to define attribute values for each vertex in a zone first last and all intermediate vertices 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 207 VMOD Flex Help Specifying Boundary Condition Data Boundary condition data can be specified by using the Data Input Grid Each column in the data input grid represents a required attribute for the selected boundary condition For more information on the required parameters for each boundary condition please see the appropriate section under Boundary Conditions Overview b14 BoundaryCo
247. polygon or polyline data objects gt Creating Surfacesl 12 Interpolate XYZ points using Krigging Natural Neighbor or Inverse Distance The resulting surfaces can be used to define geological layers or 2D parameter distributions Kx Recharge etc 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 11 VMOD Flex Help 9 Minimum Data Requirements In order to build your conceptual model you require at least the following data objects gt Two Surfaces One for the top and one for the bottom of a geological unit gt Apolygon that represents the model area Once you have the data loaded Click Next Step to proceed You may return to this step in the workflow at any time during the model process to import or create new data objects See the following table for some typical data object types and how they are used in the conceptual model workflow If you have First you should River locations in a Import these as Select this data object shapefile Polylinelsc data when creating a river objects boundary condition Geological layers in a Import these as Select these data Surfer GRD or ASCII Surfacelss data objects when defining GRD objects horizons Air photo with river Import this as a Map Select this new polyline location imagelss data object when Then Create a new creating a river boundary Polylinelt18 data object condition Digitize the polyline in a 2D Viewer XYZ points for Import these as Points
248. ppearing on the side menu bar of each Properties screen e Database View and edit the property zone values Each of these tools are described in the following sections Database The Database button loads the property database window as shown in the following figure The database window is used for viewing and editing the parameter values and settings for all property zones in the model The functionality and settings for the property zones are described below Each row of the property database table contains information about each of the model property zones including e Zone number and associated color e Zone parameter values The zone parameter values can be modified by simply entering a new value in the desired field 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 266 Each group of flow properties exists as a separate item in the model tree as shown below Right click on each node and select Settings This will allow you to modify some of the appearance of each parameter group In addition each property group can be added to a stand alone 3D view to do this right click and select 3D Viewer AIRPORT2 REVISED i C Model Boundary a E Mode Domain C Boundary Conditions 5 O AIRPORT2 REVISED grid C Constant Heads Rivers C Recharges io 6 C Pumping Wells 6 C Zone Budget GC Particles m Outputs Z Heads Adjusting Style Settings The style setti
249. ptual Model Provide a name for the conceptual model start date and model area From the Data Explorer select the polygon data object that represents the conceptual model horizontal boundary and then click the gt button Note The model area cannot be defined using a complex polygon or one that contains multiple polygons A complex polygon is a polygon that intersects with itself 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 24 Conceptual Model O OB Define Modeling Objectives EJ Collect Data Objects Define Conceptual Model Name Conceptual Model 1 Description Start date 2 3 2012 Model Area Select existing data object boundary Projection Type Coordinate Systems Datum World Geodetic System 1984 e Click Next Step to proceed to the Define Model Structure step Define Structure Defining the geological model consists of providing geological surfaces as inputs for horizons then three dimensional solids are created between these horizons To create new horizons follow the steps below e From the Horizons Settings dialog shown below click the Add Horizon button to add a new horizon row to the Horizon Information table e Repeat this two more times so there are 3 new rows on the Horizons table e From the Data Explorer select the ground surface data object that will be used to generate the horizon e Click the gt button in Row1 of the
250. r The head information in the 3D Gridded data object can be extracted and interpolated for a surface or points data object You can then use the Color by Attribute feature to display the heads information on the surface or points data object Likewise this can be used for visualizing any attribute contained in a 3D Gridded data object on a surface or points data object This procedure is described below General Operations Attributes Select Operation Create new attribute Description and Instructions Creates a new attribute with values from the selected data object s attribute Input Parameters _ Parameter Value dataDbject gt 3dGrid_Newkx lt I Save As New Data Object Execute This operation can be accessed from the Settings dialog Select the surface or points data object in the Data Explorer right click and then select Settings Once the Settings dialog launches expand the Operations node and select Attribute from the settings tree e Select Create new Attribute from the Select Operation combo box e Select the 3D Gridded data object from the Data Explorer and select the gt button to insert the data object into the dataObject field e Once the 3D Gridded data object is selected its available attributes are populated in the Attribute combo box Select the desired attribute from the Combo box e Optional Select the Save As New Data Object check box to save the transfo
251. r defined in the general settings for this particular shape element The Show in Cutaway check box allows you to show areas the line in cutaway regions in the 3D Viewer window When this option is disabled lines will not show in any areas that have been hidden in the 3D Viewer window by creating Cutaways For information please see the Creating Cutaways h28 section Labels 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services General Operations Style Lines General Labels Format Placement Colors Vertices General M Show Labels Data Settings M Text String Label Field WIDTH 7 M Text Symbol Font Style rial bd 10 Regular l A Size Color Preview ABC The following label settings are available under the General node shown above e Show Labels Show Hide the labels in 2D 3D viewer e Label Field This combo box contains all attributes for the selected data object Select the desired attribute field to use for the labels e Font Select the label font from the combo box Format 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Size Set the text size of the labels Color Set the color of the label text Style Set the font style for the labels e g Regular Bold Font Italicized etc 157 VMOD Flex Help The following label settings are available under the Format node e Format Choose be
252. r group is selected For example if conductivity is selected the data input grid will show the parameters Kx Ky and Kz The data input grid will already be populated with the default values specified in the Project Settings File gt Project Settings Property Values Group of parameters to define Conductivity Kx Ky Kz Parameter Unit Method Value Object Mapping d m s Constant z 4E 06 Ky m s Constant z 4E 06 Kz m s Constant Y 4E 07 cht e Type the desired values for the property zone Kx 4E 6 Ky 4E 6 Kz 4E 7 e Click on the Save button located on the right side of the window e Repeat these steps for the other property zone e Click on the Use Structural Zone button e Select Zone2 from the model tree e Click on 3l button to insert the zone in the Structural Zones field as shown below e Type the desired values for property zone2 Kx 7E 5 Ky 7E 5 Kz 7E 6 e Click on the Save button located on the right side of the window Define Property Zones Create New Property Zone Method Select one or more structural zones Property Zones j Property Zone 1 Use Structural Zone s Prover e ee 2a Use Polygon Data Object seater Name Property Zone 2 Description Save Property Values Group of parameters to define Conductivity Kx Ky Kz x Parameter Unit Method Value Object Mapping gt m s Constant PA 7E 15 PA Ky m s Constant EA 7E 05 Z K
253. r keyboard Tip When a data object is shown in 2D Viewer and the viewer is set to Pick Mode you can select a row from the attribute or geometry table and the corresponding feature will be highlighted in the 2D Viewer Modifying Attribute and Geometry Data Imported geometry and attribute data can be modified in the Data Table To make changes to data click the Begin Edit button to enter edit mode Make the necessary changes to the data table and once finished click the amp End Edit button to save the changes Please note that the data table only allows you to modify existing attribute and geometry data Currently VMOD Flex does not allow you to create new columns i e new data object attributes This can only be done during the data import process Well Table For Wells data objects the data table is different than that of other data objects The Well data table is designed to allow you to add and or modify wells and associated well data e g pumping schedule screen intervals observation points etc To access the well table right click on a Wells data object in the Data Explorer and select Settings In the Settings dialog click on the Table button In the Well Table there are two tabs Vertical and Horizontal Each tab is described in the following sections Vertical Wells The Vertical tab allows you to view and modify data for vertical wells 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services S Tableview 45
254. rations to display multiple 3D or 2D Viewers simultaneously e g cascade tile horizontally vertically e Zoom rotate and move data within the viewer using your mouse e Modify viewer settings including the background color and vertical exaggeration 3D Viewer only e In 3D Viewers remove parts of the displayed data by creating cutaways along the X Y and Zaxis e In 2D Viewers select individual data object features points line shapes and then view the corresponding attribute data in spreadsheet view and vice versa Edit data object geometry in 2D Viewer e Modify existing data objects by manually digitizing points polylines and polygons e Rotate scale and delete shapes e Undo all edits and revert back to original shape Define Multiple Conceptual Models e Create multiple conceptual models with different interpretations or copy existing conceptual models e Define conceptual model geometry using imported data objects e Define the horizontal model boundary using an imported or digitized polygon data object e Create vertical horizons from surfaces that are either imported or created by interpolating raw XYZ points e Select from different horizon types to accommodate various geological conditions 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Introduction 6 pinchouts discontinuous layers etc e Automatically create 3D structural zones from defined horizons Property Modeling e Create property zones from imported or digiti
255. rder to be deemed valid e The pumping well must located within the simulation domain e A screen must be defined for the pumping well e A pumping schedule must be defined for the pumping Wells that do not meet these requirements will not be included For information on defining well data i e screens pumping schedules please see Well Tablelis4 section VMOD Flex will then add the boundary condition under the Boundary Condition node in the Conceptual Model tree 7 6 3 Theory Every model requires an appropriate set of boundary conditions to represent the system s relationship with the surrounding systems In the case of a groundwater flow model boundary conditions will describe the exchange of flow between the model and the external system In the case of a mass transport model the boundary conditions will also describe the exchange of solute mass between the model and the external system The following sections present an overview of the boundary condition packages supported in VMOD Flex Each section includes a brief description of the boundary condition including the 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 215 VMOD Flex Help input data required by MODFLOW and the supported data objects for defining the boundary condition geometry The following boundary conditions are discussed in this section Well The pumping well boundary condition is used to simulate wells or other features that withdraw water from or add water to
256. re 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 220 Biger Boundary Head Model Grid Schematic of General Head Boundary The primary differences between the General Head boundary and the Specified Head boundary are e the model solves for the head values in the General Head grid cells whereas the head values are specified in Constant Head cells e the General Head grid cells do not act as infinite sources of water whereas Specified Head cells can provide an infinite amount of water as required to maintain the specified head Therefore under some circumstances the General Head grid cells may become dry cells Required Data The General Head Boundary Package requires the following information for each General Head grid cell e Stage This is the head of the external source sink This head may be physically based such as a large lake or may be obtained through model calibration e Leakance The leakance is a numerical parameter that represents the resistance to flow between the boundary head and the model domain In contrast to the River Drain and Evapotranspiration packages the General Head package provides no limiting value of head to bind the linear function in either direction Therefore as the head difference between a model cell and the boundary head increases decreases flow 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 221 VMOD Flex Help into or out of the cell continues to increase
257. re you can see the parameters for a single cell or group of cells e Click Next Step to proceed You will arrive at the Flow Boundaries step Proceed to Run or Define Optional Model Elements e You will arrive at a choice screen here you can proceed to some of the non essential inputs for the model such as Zone Budget Zones Particle Tracking or Observation Wells Or you can proceed to Running the simulation 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help a Untitled O O FI e Click the Select Run Type button to proceed Mouse over this and you will see the blue Next arrow appear on top just left click once to select this option Alternatively the Next step button will take you to this step as it is pre define as the default step G OE E Define Modeling Objectives EJ Define Numerical Model i Create Grid EJ Import Model EJ View Edt Grid EJ Define Properties EJ Define Boundary Conditions S E Select the Next Step I Define Observation Zones li Define Observation Wels Ill Define Zone Budget Zones Ii Define Particles eo IE PEST Run Ii Single Run Nun OR rical Engines View Results Select Run Type Engines to Run Engine MODFLOW 2000 Iv MODPATH iv _ ZoneBudget z Single Run PEST PEST Run e Click the Compose Engines button to proceed Alternatively the Next step button will take you to
258. rer A well can only be used if it meets the following requirements e The pumping well must be located within the simulation domain e Ascreen must be defined for the pumping well e A pumping schedule must be defined for the pumping well For information on importing well data please see Importing Wells 5 section For information on defining well data for existing wells data objects please see the Well Tablelis section Constant Head Currently this boundary condition is only supported for Finite Difference Model translation The Specified Head boundary condition also known as Constant Head in VMOD Flex is used to fix the head value in selected grid cells regardless of the system conditions in the 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow a6 surrounding grid cells thus acting as an infinite source of water entering the system or as an infinite sink for water leaving the system Therefore specified head boundary conditions can have a significant influence on the results of a simulation and may lead to unrealistic predictions particularly when used in locations close to the area of interest During translation VMOD Flex uses the Time Variant Specified Head Package provided with MODFLOW The MODFLOW input data for Specified Head cells is stored in projectname CHD file Unlike most other transient MODFLOW boundary condition packages the Specified Head package allows the specified heads
259. rger Water Services 193 VMOD Flex Help a9 Fie Tools Window Help Workflow D H O BI EJ Define Modeling Objectives EJ Collect Data Objects EJ Define Conceptual Model EJ Define Model Structure J Define Property Zones G Data amp ground B layer2top amp layer2bottom O boundary MG chd east 4 chd west WZ rivers lt 0000 Model Explorer S Conceptual Model 1 Model Boundary iy Structure 5 C Horizons Horizon Horizon2 Horizon3 M Zone2 C Properties 5 Simulation Domain Model Domain C Boundary Conditions 4 Conceptual Model 3D Viewer 1 Quick Overview Instructions Pre requisites Result Next Steps Define Property Zones Create New Property Zone Method Select one or more structural zones 4 kE Structural Zones Property Zones Use Structural Zone s Use Polygon Data Object Name Description Save Property Values Group of parameters to define Define flow properties for the conceptual model Structural Zones are createdhs4 lf you wish to use a property distribution you have imported or created surfaces If you wish to use shapefiles you have imported or digitized polygons One or more property zones are created Define Boundary Conditions boo At this step you define Property Zones for th
260. rger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow ss all Residual between Heads and Heads 2 Views l ma Attribute Heads m la 7300 i v Layer gm J EFTA CL A Layer View Row Column Layer 1 Row 1 Column 3 X 179 91 Y 1974 67 Heads 0 The same option is available for Drawdown Just launch Compare from the Drawdown node on the Output model tree and choose the Drawdown from another model run ora DDN file from the hard disk Limitations The comparison calculation has the following assumptions Both models must have e The same start date as defined in the Conceptual Model settings e The same stress periods e Spatial coverage XY extents e Angle of rotation 10 13 Duplicating Models Traditionally multiple scenarios of a model would be handled by saving the entire project as a new file This makes it difficult to keep track of various versions of the model and which inputs lead to specific results etc In VMOD Flex a numerical model run can be duplicated or cloned and managed and modified in a single project This facilitates an iterative approach to modeling by allowing you to adjust a few input parameters translate and run and interpret the results You can also 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 319 VMOD Flex Help Compare Heads or Drawdown between model runs to other scenarios To Clone a numerical mod
261. ribute and map any associated parameter e g recharge in the source data to the new attribute If necessary repeat for additional parameters in the time schedule Data mapping and creating new attributes are described in the Data Mappingl771 section The final step in the time schedule import process is data validation VMOD Flex will validate the mapped data and highlights any rows that contain invalid data e g null values wrong assigned data type duplicate rows etc Please see Data Validation 7s for more information on data validation Click the Next button to import the data Once imported a time schedule data object will be added in the Data Explorer 4 2 Importing VMOD MODFLOW Models Importing Visual MODFLOW Projects 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 111 VMOD Flex Help A Before You Start VMOD Flex currently supports flow simulations only If you need to modify or maintain a model that utilizes any of the following features you must continue to use Visual MODFLOW Classic interface for this gt PEST gt Transport MT3DMS MT3D99 RT3D PHT3D SEAWAT gt MODFLOW SURFACT MODFLOW 96 MODFLOW NWT gt MNW Package gt ETS1 Package To import your Visual MODFLOW project select the VMF file and click OK to continue While the model is created you will see the corresponding inputs added to the model tree Importing MODFLOW 2000 2005 Data Sets Often you may need to import an exis
262. rids Meshes 240 Instructions Create the superelement mesh define the mesh size and define vertical layering type and resolution Pre requisites The Conceptual Model has been defined 177 Result A finite element mesh is created Next Steps Convert Conceptual Model to FEFLOW finite element modelbs2 From the Select Grid Type step in the Conceptual Model workflow click on the Define Finite Element Mesh button a File Tools Window T5 Workflow TE PRAIL s OR E Data D ground EJ Define Modeling Objectives Select the Grid Type DE layer2top EJ Collect Data Objects ET 1 layer2bottom EJ Define Conceptual Model MO boundary EJ Define Model Structure OG chdeast EJ Define seat Zones OG chd west fh wers Define Finite Difference Grid Define Finite aN Mesh Model Explorer E Conceptual Model 1 C Model Boundary a i Structure S C Horizons j Horizont HO Horizon2 Horizon3 L Zones O Zone1 0 Zone2 D E Properties E Conductivity C Property Zone 1 L Property Zone 2 i Simulation Domain S C Model Domain E B Boundary Conditions C Constant Head 1 C Constant Head West The Define Finite Element Mesh wizard will appear on your screen where you can configure the properties of the finite element mesh 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 2a VMOD Flex Help Define Finite Element Mesh EE m Name FinteEementMesh1 Design Superelem
263. rizons Horizon1 Horizon2 Horizon3 M Zone2 C Properties 5 Simulation Domain Model Domain C Boundary Conditions 4 Conceptual Model 3D Viewer 1 Using Structural Zone s This method allows you to create a property zone from existing structural zones in your conceptual model i e zones generated from horizons e Click on the Use Structural Zone button as shown below Define Property Zones Create New Property Zone Method Select one or more structural zones Structural Z Use Polygon Data Object sector Property Zones Name Description Save Property Values Group of parameters to define 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials z e Select Zone1 structural zone from the conceptual model tree under the Structure Zones node as shown below Model Explorer E Conceptual Model 1 Define Property Zones Create New Property Zone Method eee Property Zone 1 Name Property Zone 1 Descripti Save Property Values Group of parameters to define Conductivity Kx Ky Kz e Select the Group of parameters that will be defined e g Conductivity Storage or Initial heads The data input grid below will display the appropriate parameters based on which 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 2 VMOD Flex Help paramete
264. rmed data as anew data object e Click the Execute button to apply the operation Once the operation is applied you can confirm that the new attribute was created by viewing 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help the table view for the selected surface or points data object Converting Model Layers to Points Data Object For Cross Section data objects only This operation allows you to create a new points data object for each model layer interpretation from all cross sections in the data object that include this interpretation Once the points data objects are created you can then create surface data objects which can then be used to define the horizons of your conceptual model Note This feature is available for model layer interpretations only H Settings General Operations Operations Select Operation Convert model layer interpretations to points data object Description and Instructions Create a new XYZ points data object for each model layer interpretation from all cross sections that include this interpretation The points can then be interpolated to create surfaces Parameter Value J Save As New Data Object Execute To create points data objects from cross section interpretation model layers e From the Select Operation combo box select Convert Model Interpretations to Points Data Object default e Click the Execute button to apply the operatio
265. roblems with large grids more than about 40 000 cells and or a highly variable hydraulic conductivity field The advantages of multigrid methods over the other iterative solvers mentioned are 1 the effectiveness of the multigrid solver is not dependent on the initial head distribution and 2 for many problems of interest the rate of convergence scales approximately linearly with the size of the domain unlike the other solvers where the rate of convergence increases nonlinearly Demmel 1997 The Solver settings window contains a number of user defined solver settings which can influence the speed and effectiveness of the AMG solver e Max Iterations MXITER Default 50 MXITER is the maximum number of times that the AMG routines will be called to obtain a solution MXITER is never less than 2 and rarely more than 50 MXITER often equals 2 when the problem is linear all layers are confined and no boundary conditions are nonlinear the Evapotranspiration Drain and River Packages for example produce nonlinear boundary conditions For nonlinear 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 201 VMOD Flex Help problems MXITER generally is 50 or less however values near 50 and sometimes even larger are needed for more severely nonlinear problems Max Cycles MXCYC Default 50 For each call to the solver AMG cycles through one or more sequences of coarsening and refinement The solver is limited to a maximum of MXCYC cycles
266. roperties and boundaries assigned to grid cells running the MODFLOW engines and analyzing the results The following sections are covered 1 Define Modeling Objectives less 2 Define Edit Gridkss through importing or creating OOF 7 Define Modeling Objectives 3 View Edit Properties ke3 vertical Define Numerical Model layering and resulting vol W Create Grid ayering and resulting volume models T iro i j i View Edit Grid 4 View Edit Boundary Conditions 270 E ide k constant heads drains pumping Define Boundary Conditions wells recharge etc Select the Next Step E Define Observation Zones E Define Observation Wells Define Zone Budget Zones 5 Define Observation Wells b74 6 Define Zone Budget Zones 273 W Define Particles Select Run Type 7 Define Particles k7 W W PEST Run J 8 Translation kosl Translate l 9 Run Numerical Engines kos IO ras Re 10 View Results fs10 View May e Contours and Color Floods f1 e Charts b14 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 259 VMOD Flex Help 10 1 Define Objectives The first step in defining your numerical model is to Define the Modeling Objectives VMOD Flex currently supports saturated flow simulations only Future releases will support variably saturated flow density dependent flow and transport simulations The available engines provides a preview of what engines are available based on your selected objectives V
267. rsened but the columns are not If ISC 4 then there is no coarsening Typically the value of ISC should be 0 or 1 In the case that there are large vertical variations in the hydraulic conductivities then a value of 1 should be used If no coarsening is implemented ISC 4 then the GMG solver is comparable to the PCG2 ILU 0 solver described in Hill 1990 and uses the least amount of memory e Damping factor DAMP This factor allows the user to reduce dampen the head change calculated during each successive outer iteration For most well posed and physically realistic groundwater flow problems the dampening factor of one will be appropriate This parameter can be used to make a non convergent oscillating or divergent solution process more stable such that a solution will be achieved This is done by decreasing the damping factor to a value between 0 and 1 only rarely lt 0 6 This parameter is similar to acceleration parameters used in other solvers 10 10 1 4 3 WHS The WHS Solver uses a Bi Conjugate Gradient Stabilized Bi CGSTAB acceleration routine implemented with Stone incomplete decomposition for preconditioning of the groundwater flow partial differential equations This solver as all iterative solvers approaches the solution of a large set of partial differential equations iteratively through an approximate solution Because the matrix equation for groundwater flow is initially ill conditioned effective pre condit
268. rt every fi gt th node lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help When importing a HDS file the Gridded data for existing grid option will be automatically 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help selected The grid dimensions in the source file must be identical to the dimensions of a grid in your project Select the existing numerical grid from Conceptual Model tree and then click the button When importing a DAT file the Gridded data for existing grid option will be unchecked RE Data Import i 0 x J Gridded data for an existing grid Grid origin x Y Z foo m 0 0 m 0 0 m Rotation foo degree Import the true grid dimensions High quality slower performance C Import a reduced grid size Lower quality higher performance The true grid data can be retrieved from the data object after import Import every fi th node lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help When this option is selected the Grid Origin frame will display If the gridded data is in model coordinates specify the Grid Origin and the degree of Rotation If the grid is in world coordinates you may leave the grid origin as is For both file types you can specify the grid resolution To import the full grid dimensions select Import the true grid dimensions option Please note that depending on the performance capabilities of your computer 3D Gridded data containing large volumes o
269. ructure This grid is useful where you have discontinuous layers Cross sectional view of deformed uniform grid from Visual MODFLOW For Deformed Uniform grids you must specify a Minimum Cell Thickness see above and the Number of Layers 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 235 VMOD Flex Help Once the grid is created it will appear as a new node in the tree as shown below z AIRPORT2 REVISED i C Model Boundary QB Structure D Properties 2 Simulation Domain E Model Domain P ad an Candian O AIRPORT2 REVISED grid i 3 0 Properties B 00 Aow i L Conductivity bo hu O InitialHeads 2 C Boundary Conditions 6 0 Constant Heads C Rivers C Recharges 6 C Pumping Wells C Zone Budget 6 0 Particles J Outputs i V Heads S Forward Pathlines 8 1 1 Edit Grid When a numerical grid is initially created see Creating a Finite Difference Gridkzst section the horizontal grid spacing is uniform However in many situations it is advantageous to have non uniform grid spacing to allow for finer grid discretization in the areas of interest and larger grid spacing in areas which are less important or where less data is available VMOD Flex allows you to refine or coarsen areas of a numerical grid by adding or removing grid lines within a specified row column interval This process is described in the following section Note You cannot refine coarsen areas of a grid that overla
270. s from well tops please see Converting Well Tops to Points Data Objecth4 section To add well top information to the Well Top table follow the steps below e Select Well Tops from the Data to Display box e Select the well from the Well Heads table for which well top data will be added e Click the Add Row button from the Well Tops toolbar to add a new item to the table e Enter the location of the well top as a measured depth in the Depth field e Enter the name of the formation e g Clay Sand etc in the Formation field Horizontal Wells The Horizontal Well tab is used to store information on deviated horizontal wells and contains many of the features available in the Vertical Well tab e g add modify screens pumping schedule observation points etc Please refer to the previous section for a description of these common features The primary difference of the horizontal well tab is the ability to view and modify the deviated Well Paths 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services HE Tableview Vertical Horizontal Find Well Heads PERTE Name x Y Zmax 535800 4814059 41989487 324 Zmin 220 3 535401 4814229 69989488 324 220 Elevation Elevation Total Vertical Depth TVD 595720 4814200 220 535670 4814250 220 535570 4814350 Well Path Table Data Settings Data To Display Active Welk 2 Divers Well tops Screens Screen location
271. s section data objects the number of wells and cross sections is displayed For Property and Structural Zone conceptual model objects various statistics are automatically calculated and displayed under the statistics nodes including Min and Max X Y and Z values Area and Volume Data Table General The data table allows you to view the geometry and attribute values of a data object The data table can be accessed from the General settings in the Settings dialog or it can be launched by right clicking on the data object in the Data Explorer and selecting Spreadsheet Note Map and Cross Section data objects do not have a data table I E LT T j Attribute Geometry 4862900 574366 679 4863050 574366 679 4863349 39 574520 4863349 39 574666 4862849 39 574666 4863000 574666 4863349 39 574720 4862849 39 574800 4863050 574850 4862849 39 574850 4862999 574850 4863050 574850 4863349 39 574900 4963120 The Attribute tab contains the attribute data of the selected data object Each column in the attribute tab represents an attribute The Geometry tab contains the geometry X Y Z values of the data object In both tabs the FID column uniquely identifies each feature in the data 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 134 object To copy data to the Windows clipboard highlight the data to be copied and then click the Copy button d or press CTRL C on you
272. s sent to the terminal instead of the MF2K LIST output file e Multigrid Preconditioner ISM ISMis a flag that controls the type of smoother used in the multigrid preconditioner The possible values for ISM and their meanings are as 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 286 follows If ISM 0 then ILU 0 smoothing is implemented in the multigrid preconditioner This smoothing requires an additional vector on each multigrid level to store the pivots in the ILU factorization If ISM 1 then Symmetric Gauss Seidel SGS smoothing is implemented in the multigrid preconditioner No additional storage is required for this smoother users may want to use this option if available memory is exceeded or nearly exceeded when using ISM 0 Using SGS smoothing is not as robust as ILU smoothing additional iterations are likely to be required in reducing the residuals In extreme cases the solver may fail to converge as the residuals cannot be reduced sufficiently e Semicoarsening Control in the Multigrid Preconditioner ISC A flag that controls semicoarsening in the multigrid preconditioner The possible values of ISC and their meanings are given as follows If ISC 0 then the rows columns and layers are all coarsened If ISC 1 then the rows and columns are coarsened but the layers are not If ISC 2 then the columns and layers are coarsened but the rows are not If ISC 3 then the rows and layers are coa
273. s to be used Number of Classes and Equal Intervals e Number of Classes Specify the number of color classes in the text box e Equal Intervals Specify an interval spacing and the number of classes will be determined from the range of the attribute data For example if your data rage is 100 and you specify a 10 interval spacing 10 classes will be created As the number of intervals classes is modified rows are removed or added to the color table The maximum value will always be Red and the minimum value will always be Blue but the gradient between will change automatically depending on the specified number of classes Click the Apply button to view the changes in an active 2D or 3D Window Contour Lines 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 16 VMOD Flex Help General Operations Style Colors a M Show Contour Lines Contour Line M Show Contour Labels M Interval options Number of contour 10 Contour Interval fo Lines style settings Label settings Line Style Label Spacing fi 00 Line width Label Margin 1 1 Number of decimals Color 0 Specified Label Font The Contour Lines node provides options for showing contour lines on the surface layer The following options are available Show Contour Lines Show Hide the contour lines Show Contour Labels Show Hide the contour labels Number of Con
274. s your current step which steps have been completed and which steps you may proceed to next The image below provides an explanation of this r ad Workflow Diagram Legend B This is your current step E You are allowed to move to the step The step is completed You need to complete necessary prerequisite steps before moving to the step E Do not show again 2 1 Main Menu The following sections describe the various menu and toolbar options in VMOD Flex File Menu The File menu provides access to standard operations such as open save close project The Project Preferences can also be modified 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help Tools Menu The Tools menu provides the following options Free Memory allows you to free up the memory usage if you have been running a number of high demand 3D visualization operations Preferences Allows you to adjust the 3D Viewer performance preferences 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Program Overview u G 3 Preferences for 3D Viewer OpenGL Driver Use hardware accelerator Use MS Driver Virtual Grid Number of Cells on X Y 60 Point Style Basic only sphere and cube Advanced all symbols Parallel Execution V use parallel OK Canca Hep OpenGL Driver By default VMOD Flex will attempt to use the vendor provided driver included with your graphics acceler
275. s31 from various file types using the import utility or created by interpolating one or more points data objects This chapter describes the process of creating surfaces from points data objects Surfaces are required in VMOD Flex for defining the vertical boundaries of structural zones i e horizons in a conceptual model However surfaces can also be used to assign spatially variable attributes to property zones and boundary conditions or for simply visualizing spatial variation using the 2D or 3D Viewers The create surface process allows you to generate surfaces using any numeric attribute in a point data object The point data object can be one that has been imported using the import utility or one that has been generated from other data objects e g cross sections and wells For more information on creating points data objects from well data and cross sections please see Creating Points from Model Layer cross sections 45 and Converting well tops to points datah4el This chapter presents information on the following topics Creating a New Surface General Settings Interpolation Settings Creating a Surface To create a new surface follow the steps below e From the Data Explorer right click anywhere and select Create Surface from the pop up menu 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 113 VMOD Flex Help Settings View Spreadsheet Export Delete Import Data Create Surface Create
276. sassudnsscsesesstusiscsncsesiedesacavevesetecsucsactotaceasiteossesecses 182 DEFINING TNE SEFUCEUTE csecesbeeleoeecsncskesticisccbchesdescenuset s e aeaa aaae aaee aA A aaea a Sadrana ovisi aai edota tapadas 184 Defining Property Zones edscceededecceescecdecevecsssseacesnvacsvesdssustedetvevececevescennvestevesedeasceussecbasousteecvessecuevvasevetvenvet evose 192 Defining Boundary COnditionsessisisiscscsccccescisdecscsscssssctecsoesccostessessscencsve sesstesceseusiesnsdcssdesasadessceaaseesesieevescesiesvecsoiecdee 200 Define Boundary Conditions Lines Polygons ssscccsssssccesssssccecsssscccessssccecesssaceeeesssnaecesssaneeecessaeeeeessaeeesessaeeeeeens 203 Define Pumping Wells isciciccccscscissscssscesceiccasdecascpesssssiscasdesinnadeiessaiaeodssaivacetacscuasseeiesdigessaiaaubetaiccasscsbesdaesisiassaasacececace s 212 THEO e E EA EEE Vn a a AE A EEA A A E a E A E EE 214 Defining Grids Meshes 228 Create Finite Difference Grid ccsssssssscssssscssssssssssssssassesessssessesssssssssssssssssesssassssssssassssesssassesesssasessesesssssessaases 229 Toli eae As E A SA EAE BEE NSE E EEDE SEESE AES AAE E A E E EE decbodesdessencevetsetsdeuduaveceerselsccesbecsceccussssudsvetcees Define Child Grid for LGR Create Finite Element Mesh Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models 248 Converting TO MODFLOW sissessssasscessaidaiscssnsduscesesncensscoseatecsesededssheasescecevccuacsecvecsesetssscsecsedsaestestess
277. sented ina workflow In the Workflow window you see the steps that make up a workflow and at each step there is a corresponding GUI with which you interact The benefits to you as a modeler 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help are unlimited e Simplicity You know where you are and where you have to go This dramatically reduces the learning curve e Accessibility all the actions you need are available at your fingertips no more hunting for an option deep inside a menu e Convenience modeling is iterative and requires a frequent amount of flipping between input run and results The workflow GUI simplifies these back and forths In VMOD Flex there is a workflow for Numerical Modeling and a workflow for Conceptual Modeling The workflow panel contains a toolbar and a list of steps required for your current workflow OF CJ Define Modeling Objectives Collect Data Objects Define Con Navigating a Workflow Go to the Previous Step in the workflow 3 Go to the Next Step in the workflow Hide the workflow panel ideal when Ba 7 you want to maximize the viewing space for visualization and editing 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Program Overview 12 Expand the workflow panel this button is only available when the workflow panel has been collapsed Workflow States Beside each state in the workflow there is a corresponding icon The icon helps you to identify which i
278. settings Discharge Options bose Select the option to control the discharge of the particles at sinks Reference Timelsos Set the reference time options for particle releases 10 10 2 1 Discharge Options The Discharge Options are used to tell MODPATH what to do with particles when they enter a grid cell where water is leaving the system Any grid cell where water is leaving the system is Classified as a sink For example an extraction well is a sink or all cells in layer 1 with evapotranspiration are sinks Weak Sink Options In many cases the water leaving the system through a grid cell is less than the amount of water entering the grid cell If this difference is small the cell is classified as a weak sink Since MODPATH cannot always determine if a particle should be removed from the system when it encounters a weak sink there are three options to control how particles should be treated when sinks are encountered e Particles always pass through cells with weak sinks e Particles are always stopped when they enter cells with internal sinks e Particles are stopped in the cells where discharge to sinks is greater than a specified total inflow to the cell default 5 The desired Weak Sink Option may be selected from the Discharge Options window shown in the following figure 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 307 VMOD Flex Help Translate Translate General 4 Discharge Settings Week Sink Option
279. shape element to be colored e g Points e From the Color combo box select the By Attribute option e From the Settings tree select the Colors node and the following dialog will appear B Settings e General Col Operations Select Data 5 y Attribute Max 361 6556 AvgW Level z D Labels Min 244 9531 Color Classification Max 361 6556 E Use Project Color Palette Show Project Palette Type Classes Stretched Number of Classes 7 Classified Equal Intervals Color Value Label My 250 165 1 342 205211039316 E 190 255 7 322 754795585723 We 91 255 49 303 304380132129 I 64 255 167 283 853964678535 Wy 44 166 240 264 403549224942 MM 8 8 255 244 953133771348 Min 244 9531 e Select the desired attribute from the Attribute combo box You will notice that the min and max values are displayed to the right of the combo box Some data objects will have attributes while others will not The following table lists which data object types 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 152 can have attributes available for color rendering Data Object Points Polygons Polylines Surfaces 3D Gridded Data Conductivity Storativity Initial Heads Recharge Evapotranspiration Heads Drawdown Available Attributes Only if attributes were created during import Z Z and other attributes that were added during import Zonel
280. she3l e 3D Gridded Datalts Points Polylines and Polygons Points Vertices The style settings for points data objects are described below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 150 Settings 7 General General Operations Style General Colas Show Vertices Labels Appearance Color By Attribute x Symbol Circle zj Size 2 Show in Cutaway region Select the color method symbol and size from the appropriate combo boxes The Show in Cutaway check box allows you to show points or vertices in cutaway regions in the 3D Viewer window When this option is disabled points or vertices will not show in any areas that have been hidden in the 3D Viewer window by creating Cutaways For information on creating cutaways please see Creating Cutaways lize section Choose from the following color methods e Specified Points are colored using the color specified in the General settings e By Attribute Points are colored based on a specified data object attribute as explained below Color By Attribute Data objects can be colored based on a specified attribute Color rendering can be applied to any shape element that contains attributes To color a data object by attribute follow the 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 151 VMOD Flex Help steps below In the Settings for the selected data object e Expand the Style node and select the
281. should be entered as a measured depth along the well path starting from the well head Start m End m 50 Pumping Schedule pr Start End Ratel The Well Path table is used to view add and modify the well paths for horizontal wells When a well is selected from the Well Heads table its corresponding well path geometry data is displayed in the Well Path table Horizontal well paths consist of a series of points with known coordinates and elevation that represent nodes along the well path trajectory VMOD Flex then creates the well path by connecting each node in the series The Elevation frame allows you specify the Z value of the well path nodes as either an Elevation or as a Total Vertical Depth measured from ground surface Adding Well Path To add a new well path node to the Well Path table 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services m VMOD Flex Help 6 3 Select the Well from the Well Heads table for which the well path will be created Click the Add Row button from the Well Path toolbar to add a new item to the table e Enter the X Y and Z value of the well path node in the table If this is the first row in the table you would enter the X Y and Z values of the well head i e the top most node in the well path e Repeat above for additional nodes Data Operations For most data object types VMOD Flex allows you apply various arithmetic operations to your source data Operation settings
282. signated as no flow cells the MODFLOW program allows the Evapotranspiration to be applied to the grid cells in the upper most active wet layer in the model The Evapotranspiration settings are shown in the following Evapotranspiration Options window and these are described below e Evapotranspiration is only applied to the top grid layer If any grid cells in Layer 1 are dry or if they are designated as no flow cells the Evapotranspiration values assigned to these grid cells will NOT be carried down to the underlying active wet grid cells In this case the inactive or dry cells act like an impermeable barrier to the Evapotranspiration e Evapotranspiration is applied to the specified layer It allows the user to assign the Evapotranspiration values to any of the specified model layers Evapotranspiration is applied to the uppermost active layer If any grid cells in Layer 1 are dry or if they are designated as no flow cells the evapotranspiration values assigned to these grid cells will be carried down to the upper most active wet grid cell in the same vertical column of grid cells 10 10 1 6 Lakes 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 25 VMOD Flex Help E General 4 General Settings Solution for lake stages THETA 1 6 MODFLOW 2005 Maximum number of iterations for steady state solution MSSITR 25 Settings Convergence criterion for equilibrium lake stage SSCNCR 0 01 Time Steps Solvers Recharge and EVT Lake L
283. st 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 32 i Define Boundary Condition oe Constant Head Type 1 Help Choose the desired boundary Name condition type from the list and define Constant Head a name and optionally a description ER Define where the boundary condition Description object should be connected on the simulation model domain this will determine to what model layer the boundary condition will be translated Top Bottom Intermediate You must then select a polygon or polyline to Where to connect on the Simulation Model Domain define the boundary condition Te geometry Select the Sides option if you wish to Geometry define a boundary condition to the Select a polyline or polygon from Data Explorer chd east e From the Data Explorer select the chd east polyline that represents this constant head e Click the button in the Define Boundary Condition dialog to add this polyline to the input e Click the Next button 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 33 VMOD Flex Help Edit Boundary Condition x Select how the attributes are defined Define for the entire zone Define values at vertices Linear Interpolation Just start and end points All vertices PLineO From 3D gridded From shapefile From time schedule Transient data e The next dialog allows us to define the constant head value VMOD Flex provides various opt
284. t Exaggeration 31 gt da In the Settings tree under Colormap Colors you can access the color page where you can choose which attribute you want to render in the case of Properties or Recharge and Evapotranspiration you can render by Zone or by the specified Attribute eg Kx Recharge rate etc For more information on the color by attribute feature please refer to Color By Attribute 150 section Isolines 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 173 VMOD Flex Help Settings 5 8 7 General General 7 4 Cells ES E ie Vertices E Show Isolines V Use virtual grid V Show Labels n lsolines Slice Settings ice Colormap Slice Type AutoApply lsolines Row x General Colors A b lsosurfaces Row Number 1 75 1 U Select Data Attribute Max 4 00 Zones X Min 1 00 Line properties Labels Color Number of contours Specified x 8 r Line Style Contour Interval 03 Line Width Start value 1 7 1 Ay OK Cancel He Settings for the Isolines are identical to those explained above for Slice lsolines also has an option to plot on a Cross Section see Colormap on Cross Section 7 as described above Under Select Data choose the attribute you want to use for calculating Isolines For Properties you can choose from Zones or Attributes eg Kx Additional Settings for Line Properties allow you to adjust the Line
285. t Zones Define Particles S E Select Run Type f PEST Run EJ Single Run E Translate Run Numerical Engines EJ MODFLOW 2005 Ej ZONEBUDGET MODPATH esuk View Charts E View Maps View Results a gt C Pumping Wells l i DRUMCO grid Run e Click the View Maps button 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials EJ Convert conceptual model to nun Define Properties Define Boundary Conditions Select the Next Step IJ Define Observation Zones I Define Observation Wells Define Zone Budget Zones IJ Define Particles Select Run Type I PEST Run Single Run Translate Run Numerical Engines MODFLOW 2005 Ej View Results View Chats JE Color Heads m 325 0000 327 7500 330 5000 333 2500 336 0000 338 7500 341 5000 347 0000 Layer 1 Row 99 Column 1 X 3055 45 Y 3154 03 Heads 325 3587 e You will then see color shading of the calculated heads in layer view e You can display heads along a row and along a column and in 3D using the same tools as you used earlier refer to View Edit Properties 40 section e If your model is transient use the time controls above the Flex Viewer to change the
286. t from the Data Explorer e From the Data Explorer simply the polygon or polyline data object that represents the geometry of the boundary condition e Click the button to insert the data object into the Select a polyline or polygon from the Data Explorer field Note Some boundary conditions only support one type of geometry either polygon or polyline Polygons and polyline data objects that extend beyond the model domain must be clipped before they can be used to define boundary conditions Polygons and polylines can be clipped using the clip to polygon data operations which can be accessed in the data object settings right click on the polygon or polyline in the Data Explorer and select Settings from the pop up menu For more information on data object operations please see Performing Operations on Datalt4i section e Click the Next button to proceed to the next step For boundary conditions that are to be applied to the Side s of the simulation domain VMOD Flex allows you to define the geometry by selecting the appropriate side s using an interactive 3D Viewer window This process is described in Defining Boundary Condition Geometry Sides section If you select a polygon data object to define the geometry of the boundary condition the next step is defining boundary condition parameters Please skip to Defining Boundary Condition Parameters section for information on this topic If you select a polyli
287. ta to the target fields in VMOD Flex A read only preview of the source data is presented The process of data mapping is described in the following section in greater detail 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help RE Data Import lol x m Data Mapping Target_ fields Map_to Unit category Unit Multiplier Data type x x Length m 1 Numeric Y Y Length m 1 Numeric Elevation None None None 1 Numeric xi Source Data Preview x Nj Z lay2 lay3 lay4 WellName Kx ft day Initial Heads amp 574366 6799 4862849 399 21 11 7 2 1 20 3 16 574366 6799 4862900 19 1 12 1 8 1 1 2 18 1 14 1 574366 6799 4863050 21 2 11 2 7 2 1 3 20 3 16 2 574366 6799 4863349 399 20 3 13 3 7 3 1 4 19 5 15 3 574520 4863349 399 18 1 12 1 8 1 0 1 5 18 3 13 1 574666 4862849 399 20 3 9 11 1 3 6 19 5 15 3 574666 4863000 18 1 9 5 10 5 21 7 18 3 13 1 i 2 lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Hep _ Data Mapping The first column in the Data Mapping table named Target_Fields contains the required target fields for the data object The second column named Map_to allows you to match the fields in the source data to each required target field If the column labels in the source data are identical to the labels of the target fields VMOD Flex will automatically map the columns for you However if the labels differ you must map the columns manually To map a source field t
288. te Finite Difference Grid Quick Overview Instructions Specify the horizontal grid resolution and the vertical layering type and resolution Pre requisites The Conceptual Model has been defined gd Result A numerical grid is created Next Steps Convert the conceptual model to a MODFLOW ETTI From the Select Grid Type step in the Conceptual Model workflow click on the Define Finite Difference Grid button 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Defining Grids Meshes 230 Visual MODFLOW Flex Example Conceptual Model J file Tools Window Help Workflow x Uuaa 1 00E amp Data DA ground Define Modeling Objectives Select the Grid Type DE layer2top Collect Data Objects LDE layer2bottom Define Conceptual Model MO boundary Define Model Structure OG chdeast Define Property Zones OG chd west E Select the Next Step D rivers p EZERS Define Finite Difference Grid Define Finite Element Mesh Model Explorer E Conceptual Model 1 C Model Boundary 2y Structure Horizons fC Horizont HO Horizon2 io LC Horizon3 O Zones L 0 Zone1 L 0 Zone2 5 Properties E Conductivity C Property Zone 1 L Property Zone 2 1 iiy Simulation Domain E C Model Domain S Boundary Conditions Constant Head 1 C Constant Head West e ts Conceptual Model 3D Viewer 1 Defining the Horizontal Grid By default VMOD Flex discretizes the
289. te to assign the head value in dry cells equal to the cell bottom elevation to avoid this problem Setting Minimum Saturated Thickness When PEST runs with varied model parameters some of these runs may produce dry cells and as a result MODFLOW assigns head values equal to 1 0e30 to all the dry cells This can cause the objective function to be skewed and the subsequent model runs to fail to converge If the Keep minimum saturated thickness for the bottom layer option is activated by assigning an appropriate head value to the bottom cell MODFLOW will keep the bottom cell saturated It prevents the column from drying out ensures that PEST will continue running even though the calculated head is actually below the bottom layer of the model and helps with model convergence It is recommended to not activate this option in the first run of a model because it is important to know if the dry cells exist or not and by preventing the column from drying out the model results could be misleading Hints For Using Dry Cell Wetting Cell re wetting often promotes a non converging or unstable solution which may be indicated by cells cycling between wet and dry If this happens we recommend you try the following e Make inactive any cells that you know should never become wet e Increase the Wetting threshold value This makes it more difficult for a cell to be wetted and therefore helps stop MODFLOW from repeatedly turning a cell on and then of
290. ted Note The Basic option only supports cube and sphere symbols for displaying points Restore System Settings Use this option to reset the factory style settings If you open a project from Hydro GeoBuilder some of the new display features may not immediately show up Please select Tools Restore System Settings Then save the project close and reload and this should correct the problem Project Color Palette 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Program Overview 16 VMOD Flex provides an option to use Project wide Color Palettes This is useful when you have multiple data objects that are rendering the same attribute eg heads from different model runs conductivity distributions and you want to make qualitative comparisons between these This is challenging when each data object has its own min and max values and are colored based on this However it becomes much easier when these data objects all read from a common color palette 3 Project Color Palette Attribute Heads Max Value 360 0000 Min Value 280 0000 The Project Color Palette settings allow you to set the min max values for various attributes these can then be used for various data objects and viewers throughout the project To enable the Project Color Palette option for a specific data object this must be enabled in the Color by Attribute page see Color by Attributelisol for more details Workflow Menu Allo
291. ter Services VMOD Flex Help e When working with finite difference grids Specify the number of rows and columns grid origin and the angle of rotation Choose from the following finite difference grid types Deformed Uniform Semi Uniform Perform horizontal grid refinement coarsening within a user defined row column interval Define a child grid within a numerical grid for running Local Grid Refinement LGR simulations using the MODFLOW LGR package e When working with finite elements meshes Use imported shape data objects to define the superelement mesh Choose from various Delaunay triangulation methods including constrained and conforming Refine areas of the mesh using digitized or imported polygon shapes Fit the mesh to your model domain using deformed or semi uniform vertical slices 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Program Overview e 2 Program Overview In order to become the most efficient and effective in the VMOD Flex environment it is recommended that you familiarize yourself with a few simple concepts terminology and where you can find and access things 1 MODE OW Eley lexan p ual MODFLOW Flex exam tun e File Tools Window Workflow Help D Salo Workflow Navigation Data me Objects Data i C amp drumco Bevation 1 Define Modeling Objectives YD gt H drumco Be
292. terial number and size of the drain pipe openings the amount of clogging materials and the hydraulic conductivity of clogging materials It is common to calculate drain leakance from measured values of flow rate and head difference Drain leakance value is usually adjusted during model calibration When a polyline is used to define the boundary condition geometry the default formula for the leakance is as follows COND RCHLNG x LCOND When a polygon is used to define the boundary condition geometry the default leakance formula is as follows COND DX x DY x SCOND where e COND is the Leakance e RCHLNG is the reach length of the drain in each grid cell e LCOND is the Leakance per unit length of the drain in each grid cell e SCOND is the Leakance per unit area of the drain in each grid cell e DX is the length of each grid cell in the X direction e DY is the length of each grid cell in the Y direction If the Use default leakance option is turned off the fields used for calculating the Drain Leakance value Leakance per unit length or area are removed from the table and the Leakance field becomes a read write field where any value may be entered Supported Geometry The geometry for General Head boundary conditions can be specified using polygon or polylines Recharge For finite difference models VMOD Flex supports the Recharge Package RCH included 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Mod
293. terpolation settings for the surface These settings are described in the following section Interpolation Settings 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 116 x General Settings Interpolation Settings Interpolation Method General Min Value Max Value Natural Neighbor Bilinear Inverse Distance kriging Natural Neighbor Interpolate Log Values El Grid Settings intervals Y intervals E Interpolation Domain x Max Y Max x Min Y Min E Advanced Settings Mag x Mag Mag Z Interpolation Method The interpolation method is used to interpolating Interpolation Domain Tl Use a polygon extent gt OK Cancel Help Select the interpolation method to use for generating the surface Choose from the following interpolation methods e Inverse Distance e Kriging e Natural Neighbor Below are brief descriptions of each interpolation method taken from the GSLIB Geostatistical Software Library and User s Guide Deutsch and Journel 1998 For a description of each interpolation parameter setting click on the setting and a brief description will be displayed beneath the interpolation settings grid Once the settings have been defined click the OK button to generate the surface Inverse Distance The Inverse Distance Squared method is very fast and efficient weighted average interpolation method The weighting factor applied to the data depends on
294. th a list for choosing the desired Solver and a listing of the settings for the selected Solver Each new model using MODFLOW 96 or MODFLOW 2000 will be set to use the WHS Solver by default 10 10 1 4 1 PCG PCG2 uses the preconditioned conjugate gradient method to solve the simultaneous equations produced by the model Linear and non linear flow conditions may be simulated PCG2 includes two preconditioning options modified incomplete Cholesky preconditioning which is efficient on scalar computers and polynomial preconditioning which requires less 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 283 VMOD Flex Help computer storage and with computer specific modifications is most efficient on vector computers Convergence of the solver is determined using both the head change and residual criteria Non linear problems are solved using the Picard iterations The PCG2 Package is described in Water Resources Investigations Report 90 4048 of the USGS by Mary Hill 1997 which is included in the MODFLOW reference manual on your VMOD Flex media in the Manual folder The PCG2 solver works on a two tier approach to a solution at one time step inner and the outer iterations Outer iterations are used to vary the preconditioned parameter matrix in an approach toward the solution An outer iteration is where the hydrogeologic parameters of the flow system are updated i e transmissivity saturated thickness storativity in the preconditioned set o
295. the distance of the 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 117 VMOD Flex Help point from the grid cell and is inversely proportional to the distance squared Consequently the greater the distance the data point is from the grid node the smaller the influence it has on the calculated value The Inverse Distance Squared method for interpolation may generate patterns similar to the bull s eye surrounding points of observations Selecting a larger number of nearest neighboring data points may smooth this effect but if the bull s eye pattern is undesirable then other methods for interpolation like Natural Neighbor and Kriging are recommended Kriging Kriging is a geostatistical method that produces visually appealing maps from irregularly spaced data Anistropy and underlying trends suggested in raw data can be incorporated in an efficient manner through Kriging The program used called kt3d is available in the public domain from the Geostatistical Software Library GSLIB distributed by Stanford University and is well documented by Deutsch and Journel 1998 The project kt3d performs simple Kriging ordinary Kriging or Kriging with a polynomial trend and uses the standard parameter file used by GSLIP If the semi variogram components have already been modeled by the user they can be incorporated into the program by choosing the appropriate set of parameters in the parameter file The semi variograms available include Spheri
296. the model at a constant rate during a stress period where the rate is independent of both the cell area and head in the cell For finite difference translations VMOD Flex uses the Well WEL package provided with MODFLOW The MODFLOW input data for Well cells is stored in the projectname WEL file You can define the location for horizontal or deviated wells which include the well path and the screen location When you translate your conceptual model to MODFLOW format the horizontal well screen location is converted to set of pumping well cells side by side Another option is to define a specified flux or drain boundary condition in VMOD Flex These are the workarounds since there is no MODFLOW package for horizontal wells For finite element model translations VMOD Flex translates the pumping well boundary conditions as a Type 4 Well boundary condition Please note that the defined screen interval must extend beyond half of the element height for it to be assigned the boundary condition Currently deviated horizontal well translation is not supported for finite element models If you intend to translate to FEFLOW please make sure all pumping well boundary conditions are defined using vertical wells Required Data In VMOD Flex pumping well boundary conditions are defined using the well data contained in a wells data object During the boundary condition creation process you will be required to select a wells data object from the Data Explo
297. the size and type of grid you used and the complexity of the conceptual model inputs 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Converting Conceptual Models to Numerical Models 250 a NumericalGridi Numerical Model OOF Convert conceptual model to nunj Da Converting conceptual model to numerical model Converting Boundary Conditions Recharge 11 Conceptual model to numerical model conversion has completed During the conversion the run node will be added to the model explorer under the numerical grid that you selected This tree will be populated with all the inputs from your conceptual model Properties Boundary Conditions Wells etc AIRPORT2 REVISED L Simulation Domain B pages Domain i a ail J FO Boundary Conditions C Constant Heads t C Rivers H Recharges 6 C Pumping Wells 6 T Zone Budget E C Particles When the conversion is complete you can click on the Next button on the workflow toolbar which will take you to the Define Properties les3 You can then proceed through the numerical model workflowlesal 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 251 VMOD Flex Help Converting MODFLOW Grids with Child Grids When you convert a Grid that contains one or more child grids for an LGR run the inputs on the model tree will contain objects for the parent model and each child model In the example below Conductivity
298. ticles Backward Particles O Fow Observation Wells Outputs Layer 1 Row 64 Column 63 X 1181 88 Y 8 62 Zones 1 DRUMCO grid Run e Under the Toolbox use the combo box to select from the various Property Groups Conductivity Initial Heads and Storativity e For each parameter group you can choose to render by Zones or by a selected attribute Based on your selection the color rendering in the views will change e Click Database button to see the conductivity zones that exist in your model e Use the same tools as described in the previous step to manipulate the views e The display tools will allow you to switch from discrete cells rendering to color shading contours aa A Render as cells Show color shading 4 Show hide contour lines Hl Show hide grid lines e At the bottom of the display you will see in the status bar the position of your mouse cursor in the current view XY grid position Layer Row Column and the Zone ID or attribute value for the selected cell 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help e Click Next Step to proceed to the Boundary Conditions step View Edit Boundary Conditions e Atthis step you can view edit the flow boundaries for the model WB Untitled Sa E Define Modeling Objectives EJ Define Grid Inspect Define Boundary Conditions brag Views Ke FROW Model Model To Import ae ported Grid 1 oundary Conditions Row Toolbox
299. ting MODFLOW data set into VMOD Flex in order to review the model or evaluate different scenarios VMOD Flex can import existing MODFLOW data sets provided they are in MODFLOW 2000 or MODFLOW 2005 format Note VMOD Flex currently imports MODFLOW 2000 and MODFLOW 2005 Groundwater Flow process files only As a result it will ignore files associated with the Sensitivity Process the Parameter Estimation Process and the Transport Process Support for these additional processes may be added to future versions of VMOD Flex To import a MODFLOW 2000 model data set select the NAM file or MODFLOW IN at the Import Grid screen Note The NAM file or MODFLOW IN file is an ASCII file containing a list of the input and output data files for the model and their location folder and pathname on the computer If the model files have been moved to a new location the file must be manually updated to reflect the new file location s Once you have selected the desired model data file click on the Open button to continue 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 4 3 Working with Your Data 112 For more details on the Import MODFLOW process and limitations please refer to s 2 2 of the Visual MODFLOW User Documentation Creating Surfaces In VMOD Flex a surface refer to an attribute e g elevation conductivity heads represented as a set of continuous data over an area Surfaces can either be imported directly see Importing Surfaces
300. tion from the Select Option combo box selected by default e Click the Execute button to apply the operation 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 147 VMOD Flex Help Mge hga_welltops_Coarse Gravel M38 hga_welltops_Medium Sand Me hga_welltops_Gravel i i hga_welltops_Fine Sand i hga_welltops_Silt h 3 hga_welltops_Sand MS hga_welltops_Clay iS hga_welltops_Boulder Clay Once the points data objects are created they are added to the Data Explorer using the naming convention wells data object name _ formation label shown above Calculating Well Head Elevation Z from a Surface For well data objects only This operation is only available for well data objects It allows you to calculate elevation values for each well head in the data object using a specified surface data object Please note any well head elevations that have been added manually or imported will be overwritten with the elevation values calculated from the specified surface 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings Settings B x E General Operations Operations Select Operation Calculate well head elevation 2 from a surface Description and Instructions Calculate well head elevation values from a selected surface Parameter Ve o Execute To calculate well head elevation from a surface e Select Calculate well head elevation Z from a surface from the Select Operation combo box e Se
301. tion iterations For example if WETIT 2 cell wetting would be attempted at every second iteration If a model with dry cells is having problems converging to a solution it may be a result of oscillations due to drying and re wetting of grid cells in sensitive regions of the model Setting a larger cell wetting interval value may help the solution to converge by allowing the heads in neighboring cells to get closer to a better solution before wetting the dry cells Wetting Methods The wetting of a dry cell is triggered by the head values in adjacent grid cells see Wetting threshold above The Wetting method frame has two options for determining the adjacent grid cells to use for determining whether the dry cell should be wetted e From below WETDRY lt 0 will use only the head in the grid cell directly below the dry cell to determine if the dry cell should be wetted This option is generally more stable and is particularly good when the adjacent horizontal cells are poor indicators of whether a cell should become wet e g areas with steep vertical gradients and variable bottom elevations e Wet cells from side and below WETDRY gt 0 will used the head in all four adjacent grid cells and the grid cell directly below the dry cell to determine if the dry cell should be wetted This option is useful in situations where a dry cell is located above a no flow cell such that it cannot be re wet from below It is also applicable for one layer
302. tion of an attribute e g digital elevation models Surface data can be used in VMOD Flex in the following ways e To define the horizons structural zone vertical boundaries of a conceptual model e To define the spatial distribution of a boundary condition attribute e To define the spatial distribution of a property zone attribute e g conductivity initial heads e To visualize the spatial variation of model features e g surface topography water table elevation etc VMOD Flex supports the following surface file types e ESRI ASCII Grid ASC TXT e Surfer Grid GRD e USGS Digital Elevation Model DEM To import surface data follow the steps below e Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu e Select Surface from the Data Type drop down list box e Click the button and locate the source file e Enter a Name and a Description for the imported data and click Next to continue Note Surface files that contain a large quantity of data points may require substantial time to import into VMOD Flex Next select the Coordinate System of the data being imported If the coordinate system is different than the one defined in the project settings VMOD Flex will perform a geotransformation converting all coordinates to the project s coordinate system Click the Next button to continue to the next step 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data s
303. tion of the grid cell during the course of the simulation or during the solution iterations Instead these cells were simply made inactive for the remainder of the simulation However the USGS later extended the Block Centered Flow package BCF2 to allow for the rewetting of these dry cells during a transient simulation While this represented a major advancement for more accurate representations of water table aquifers it also causes the solution to be much more unstable in some situations More detailed information on the cell wetting and the BCF package can be found in the MODFLOW Packages Reference Manual included with your Visual MODFLOW media in the Manual folder The Re wetting settings may be accessed by selecting MODFLOW Re wetting from the top menu bar of the Run section A Dry Cell Wetting Options window will appear as shown in the following figure and described below 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 299 VMOD Flex Help e Activate cell wetting IW DFLG is used to indicate if the wetting capability is active IWDFLG 1 or inactive IWDFLG 0 e Wetting threshold is used to determine if the dry cell needs to be wetted For a dry cell to become wet the head in the adjacent grid cell s must be greater than the elevation of the bottom of the dry cell plus the Wetting threshold value e Wetting interval IWETIT indicates how often MODFLOW attempts to wet the dry cells detected during the course of the solu
304. tions to be performed The maximum number of iterations will only be used if a convergent solution is not reached beforehand 50 iterations should be adequate for most problems However if the maximum number of outer iterations is reached and an appropriate mass balance error is not achieved this value should be increased e Acceleration Factor Default 1 The acceleration factor controls the magnitude of head changes between iterations The acceleration factor must be positive Values larger than one will result in larger head changes between iterations the solution may be approached faster but it may also overshoot the solution more easily Values less than one will result in smaller head changes thus requiring more iterations to reacha solution 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 290 e Head Change Criterion for Convergence Default 0 01 After each iteration is completed the solver checks for the maximum change in the solution at every cell If the maximum change in the solution is below a set convergence tolerance set here in the working units of feet or metres then the solution has converged and the solver stops otherwise a new iteration is started A solution accurate to 0 01 ft or m will normally be sufficient for most problems unless the maximum head change throughout the model domain is less than 1 foot or metre If an appropriate mass balance is not achieved and the number of iterati
305. to be linearly interpolated in time between the beginning and end of each stress period such that the specified head for a grid cell may change at each time step of a given stress period Required Data The Specified Head package requires the following information for each specified head grid cell for each stress period Start Head Specified head value at the beginning of the stress period Stop Head Specified head value at the end of the stress period Supported Geometry The geometry for Specified Head boundary conditions can be specified using Polylines or Polygons River The River boundary condition is used to simulate the influence of a surface water body on the groundwater flow Surface water bodies such as rivers streams lakes and swamps may either contribute water to the groundwater system or act as groundwater discharge zones depending on the hydraulic gradient between the surface water body and the groundwater system For finite difference models VMOD Flex uses the River Package included with MODFLOW The MODFLOW input data for River grid cells is stored in projectname RIN file Currently translation of river boundary conditions is not supported for finite element FEFLOW translations The MODFLOW River Package simulates the surface water groundwater interaction via a seepage layer separating the surface water body from the groundwater system see following figure 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 217
306. tours Specify the number of contours to display on the surface Contour Interval Set the contour increment value When this option is used VMOD Flex automatically calculates the number of contours used Line Style Select the contour line style from the combo box Choose between solid line or dashed line Line Width Set the width thickness of the contour lines Label Spacing Set the spacing between the contour line and the label Number of Decimals Set the number of decimals to show in the contour labels 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings 166 Label Font Select this button to specify the font settings for the contour labels Click the Apply button to view the changes in an active 2D or 3D Viewer 6 4 5 3D Gridded Data The following section describes the available style settings for 3D Gridded data objects To access the style settings right click on the surface data object in the Data Explorer and select Settings from the pop up menu Then in the Settings dialog expand the Style node to view the style settings Cells 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 167 VMOD Flex Help f Settings General General Style Cells General Colors a Vettices Show Cells J Use virtual grid Lines Slice Colormap Fill Settings lsolines lsosurfaces Color ByAttribute x Transparency V Show only Active Zone Show Legend
307. ttet MODPATH Translation Finish stttttettstettttettettttt Ll Constort Head 12 49 28 PM HHHHHRHHHHH ZONE BUDGET Translation Stat HERHSHAHHHHHA 2 Hinai 12 49 28 PM ZONE BUDGET Zone Fle translator Initialize O Rives 12 49 28 PM ZONE BUDGET translator Active zones for Layer 1 O River 12 49 28 PM ZONE BUDGET translator Active zones for Layer 2 O Riveri 12 49 28 PM ZONE BUDGET translator Active zones for Layer 3 C Pumping Wells E 12 49 28 PM ZONE BUDGET translator Active zones for Layer 4 ite E 12 49 28 PM ZONE BUDGET translator Active zones for Layer 5 Pumping Wells Boundary Coi 12 49 28 PM ZONE BUDGET Zone Fie translator Finalize Zone Budget 12 49 28 PM HHHHHHHHHHH ZONE BUDGET Translation Finish RRHHHRHHHHHH Partides 12 49 28 PM RHRRBHRHBHHHHHRHHH Translation Finish HERHBRARHHRHRHHHHH 7 C Forward Particles C Backward Particles Flow Observation Wells nuts g m DRUMCO grid Run Translation finished successfully e Click the Next step button to proceed You will arrive at the Run Engines Step Run Engines 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials 4 Visual MODFLOW Flex demo_ DRUMCO grid Run ag File Tools Window Help Workflow D EH Data Data 08 drumco Bevation 1 D8 drumco Bevation 2 O O Fl Define Modeling Objectives S E Define Numerical Model L8 drumco Bevation 3 I Create Grid Dg drumco Hevation
308. tween Numeric or Scientific notation e Decimals Set the number of decimals to plot for each label e Placement Polylines Only e Position Display the label above below or on the line e Offset This parameter controls how far the label will be placed from the line e Location along the line Display the label at the start in the middle or at the end of the line e Orientation to the line Display the label parallel perpendicular or horizontal to the line 6 4 2 Cross Sections The following section describes the available style settings for cross section data objects To access the style settings right click on the cross section data object in the Data Explorer and select Settings from the pop up menu Then in the Settings dialog expand the Style node to view the style settings 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings i Sel General Interpretation Operations Style Wells Interpretation Type Mode v I Show Labels M Show All iv BB Vv FF Vv GG Vv DD Cross section data objects consist of two main elements the interpretation layers and the cross section wells The settings for each element can be accessed by clicking on the Interpretation or Wells node respectively Interpretation A screen capture of the interpretation settings is shown above From the Interpretation Type combo box select which interpretation layer to show in 3D Viewer
309. ual models and numerical models and corresponding data objects for your project Conceptual Model Tree Numerical Model Tree 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Program Overview 10 Conceptual Model 2 AIRPORT2 REVISED C Model Boundary OB Structure pe C3 Properties E Simulation Domain E Model Domain Fs C Boundary Conditions 5 C AIRPORT2 REVISED grid 5 Run 5 inputs B C Properties O Flow C Constant Heads C Rivers C Recharges C Pumping Wells 5 E Outputs Simulation Domain m Z Heads Model Domain acd Forward Pathiines Gy Boundary Conditions i be C Pumping Wells Boundary Condition O River 1 HWE ORUMCO grid mie Ghee ma se o oe 2D 3D Viewers Data objects can be displayed in one or more of the following viewers e 2D View Plan view ideal for GIS data surfaces well locations images etc e 3D View Ideal for data that have X Y and Elevation Z values defined Structural Zones Wells Pathlines Heads along a cross section etc e The Flex Viewer which is available in the numerical modeling workflow and consists of a combination of a Layer Row and Column view and 3D View the individual views can be shown hidden Workflows Groundwater modeling consists of a series of steps that must be completed in a particular sequence in order to achieve a specific goal In VMOD Flex these steps are pre
310. udget engine requires a valid BGT file to be present in the project folder This file will be automatically created if MODFLOW and Zone Budget are mutually selected The Run button will run the selected numeric engines using the required translated data files already present in the project folder If the required files are not present in the project folder the numeric engines will not run A warning message will appear indicating that the Visual MODFLOW files will not be translated prior to running the model Press the Play button to start the simulation Visual MODFLOW Flex Example Sample Run1 ejaj af File Tools Window Help Workflow 8x D a O OF E Data 08 ground EJ Convert conceptual model to nun B layer2t0p Define Properties po eee CE layer2 bottom Define Boundary Conditions OO boundary S E Select the Next Step OG chdeast I Define Observation Zones Stress Period Time Step OG chdwest I Define Observation Wells 1 1 MODFLOW 2005 A ives Il Define Zone Budget Zones U S GEOLOGICAL SURVEY MODULAR FINITE DIFFERENCE GROUND WATER FLOW MODEL I Define Particles L Version 1 8 00 12 18 2009 Prec single x64 64 bit J Select Run Type ay E PEST Run OpenMP parallelized using 2 CPU Single Run Using NAME file C Users Administrator Desktop VMODFlex Projects Translate S E Run Numerical Engines MODFLOW 2005 B View Results B DE 1 06 1 26 146 1 66 1
311. ulate the effects of features such as agricultural drains which remove water from the aquifer at a rate proportional to the difference between the head in the aquifer and some fixed head or elevation The Drain package assumes the drain has no effect if the head in the aquifer falls below the fixed head of the drain Required Data The Drain Package requires the following information as input for each cell containing this boundary condition e Elevation The drain elevation or drain head of the free surface of water within the drain The drain is assumed to run only partially full so that the head within the drain is approximately equal to the median elevation of the drain e Leakance The drain leakance is a lumped coefficient describing the head loss between the drain and the groundwater system This loss is caused by converging flow patterns near the drain the presence of foreign material around the drain channel bed 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 223 VMOD Flex Help materials the drain wall and the degree to which the drain pipe openings may be blocked by chemical precipitates plant roots etc There is no general formulation for calculating drain leakance In most situations the detailed information required to calculate drain leakance is not available to the groundwater modeler These details include the detailed head distribution around the drain aquifer hydraulic conductivity near the drain distribution of fill ma
312. un Define Properties f Define Boundary Conditions Select the Next Step I Define Observation Zones I Define Observation Wells I Define Zone Budget Zones I Define Particles Select Run Type W PEST Run Single Run Translate EJ Run Numerical Engines MODFLOW 2005 E View Results View Charts W View Maps Inspect Define Boundary Conditions Views KAPRO v Layer Layer View Row Column 3D Toolbox Constant Head Edit Layer 1 Row 37 Column 2 X 3183 36 Y 11242 95 Atrribute e Under the Toolbox use the combo box to select from the various Boundary condition types e Use the same tools as described in the previous step to manipulate the views Each boundary condition group of cells will appear as its own node in the model tree You can right click on this to adjust style settings In addition you can load any group of boundary condition cells into a stand alone 3D Viewer 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 272 AIRPORT2 REVISED pue C Mode Boundary CE Structure i aa Properties 2 Simulation Domain J Model Domain Q Boundary Conditions 3 C AIRPORT2 REVISED grid Run E Inputs GL Properties 6 0 Aow i C Conductivity h iw C LintialHeads L Boundary Conditions C Constant Heads 0 Rivers 4 C Recharges H C Pumping Wells j Zone DUGE C Particle J Outputs In
313. un Numerical Engines Toolbox MODFLOW 2005 Legend ZONEBUDGET Color Heads m EJ MODPATH Eg View Ress E 22310 View Charts 62 4142 lt j View Maps 63 8974 Model Explorer 65 3806 66 8638 5 Inputs S C Properties 68 3469 Fow 69 8301 Conductivity E Storage Initial Heads Boundary Conditions Recharge Evapotranspiration Constant Heads Constant Head 1 Rivers River 0 rr River 1 Pumping Wells Pumping Wells Bc Zone Budget Particles Forward Particles Backward Particles Flow Observation Wells Outputs M Heads Drawdown Layer 1 Row 40 Column 78 X 1618 38 Y 489 18 Heads 1 00000001504747E 30 q You will then see color shading of the calculated heads in layer view You can display heads along a row and along a column and in 3D using the same tools as you used earlier lf your model is transient use the time controls above the Flex Viewer to change the output time as you do this all active viewers layer row column 3D will refresh to show the heads for the new output time ia lie 1 26 2012 3 23 PM ra mi If you ran MODPATH you will see Pathlines appear as a new node in the tree under Output circled below add a check box beside the Pathlines to display these in the active 2D 3D Viewers 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 313 VMOD Flex Help Adjusting Style Settings The style settings of either the 2D or 3D views can be adjusted First make the d
314. under construction and will be available in a future release If you are starting out a new model then follow the Conceptual Model workflowl77 this will allow you to build grid layers with varying elevations including pinchouts View Edit Grid After you have created a grid or imported a grid and associated model you will be taken to the View Edit Grid step There are several options available e Under Views select the various views you want to see in the Flex viewer VMOD Flex allows you to simultaneously show a layer row column and 3D Views e Adjust a specific layer row or column using the up down arrows or enter a specific row column or layer integer Alternatively click on the button then click on any specific row column or layer in any of the 2D views and the selected row column or layer will be set automatically 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Numerical Modeling Workflow 262 e The standard navigation tools allow you to zoom pan and in the case of 3D view rotate a9 Fie Tools Window Help Workflow D EHO O O FI E Data d amp dumco Elevation 1 EJ Define Modeling Objectives View Imported Grid amp drumco Elevation 2 EJ Define Numerical Model z Soca a ae Views P P D Baggeration 10 Virtual grid Virtual grid size 50 Wireframe M amp drumco Elevation 5 View Edit Grid Y Layer amp drumco Elevation 6 De 1 VMod Imported Wells 7 7 Row 1 A V Column 1 H a
315. ute type i e not all methods are available for every attribute The available methods may include Constant Value From 3D Gridded Data From Shapefile From Time Schedule and From Surface Each method is described below Constant Value Constant Value The constant value method allows you to define a single value for the entire zone Upon 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 209 VMOD Flex Help translation each grid cell comprising the boundary condition zone will be assigned the specified constant value When this method is selected default simply enter the desired attribute value in the Data Entry Grid Note The values for each constant value attribute should be entered in the same units as defined in the Project Settings Use Surface From Surface This method allows you to define boundary condition attributes using an existing Surface data object Upon translation attribute values are calculated from the specified surface data object A surface data object can be useful for defining an elevation attribute i e River Stage Head Lakebed Bottom etc Note The surface data object must cover the entire conceptual model domain area When this method is selected click the From Surface button to launch the Static Data Control dialog shown below To specify a surface data object e Select the desired surface from the Data Explorer e Click the 3 button to insert the surface data object into the attri
316. vation 2 Define Numerical Model ins nne P cues iC drumco Elevation 3 I Create Grid Vi a drumco Bevation 4 Import Model i E amp drumco Bevation 5 View Edit Grid E RPP rey w amp drumco Bevation 6 I Define Properties 3 J VMod imported Wells Define Bounda Column View H O Select the Next Ste Row H O View Re V Column gill i JA SRUSUUORHORHERROEEOEEREER macs 008 D ee Database ayer View Toolbox Conductivity x Zone ba Model Explorer Wels Model RUMCO grid Explorer Run 5 Inputs H 5 C Properties o SO Aow i i M Conductivity C Storage poi i Initial Heads i 3 C Boundary Conditions i beC Recharge fe 0 Evapotranspiration i i 1 Constant Heads Paid O Constant Head 1 ioi LD Rivers O River 0 River 1 Data Objects All of the data that you interact with in VMOD Flex are referred to as data objects These can consist of e Raw Data that you have e Imported From polyline or polygon shapefiles wells from a spreadsheet surfaces from Surfer GRD etc e Created Through digitizing points polygon or polylines 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 9 VMOD Flex Help e Conceptual Data Objects These are generated as you progress through the conceptual modeling workflow and include e Horizons Structural Zones Pro
317. vely It is implemented in the SOR Package by dividing the finite difference grid into vertical slices and grouping the node equations into discrete sets each set corresponding to a Slice In every iteration these sets of equations are processed in turn resulting in a new set of estimated head values for each slice As the equations for each slice are processed they are first expressed in terms of the changes in computed heads between successive iterations The set of equations corresponding to the slice is then solved directly by Gaussian elimination treating the terms for adjacent slices as known quantities The values of head change computed for the slice are then each multiplied by an acceleration variable T The results are taken as the final values of head change in that iteration for the slice This procedure is repeated for each slice in sequence until all of the slices in the three dimensional array have been processed thus completing a domain iteration The entire sequence is then repeated until the differences between the head values computed in successive iterations are less than the chosen criterion at all nodes in the mesh The SOR Package is described in detail in Chapter 13 of the MODFLOW reference manual included with your VMOD Flex media in the Manual folder The solver parameters for the SOR method are described below e Maximum Number of Iterations Default 50 This parameter provides an upper limit on the number of itera
318. w AR D H Data C Data Define Modeling Objectives Available Engines Information USGS MODFLOW 2000 from SWS USGS MODFLOW 2008 from SWS USGS MODFLOW LGR from SWS ZONEBUDGET MODPATH Simulation type Model Explorer e For this scenario the default objectives will be fine e Click Next Step to proceed Loading the Model Files e Atthis step you can choose to create a new empty numerical grid or import an existing project e Click the Import from Model button e In the next screen click the Browse button and then navigate to the folder that contains your Visual MODFLOW or MODFLOW project e Select the file and click Open to continue The import will start and you will see the status in the progress window e During the import there are a few things to observe 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials s Visual MODFLOW Flex demo Numerical Model faster x B File Tools Window Help Workflow 8x H r o oF amp Data E drumco Bevation 1 SB Define Modeling Objectives J B drumco Elevation 2 Define Numerical Model MODFLOW Visual MODFLOW project m amp drumco Elevation 3 I Create Grid D Documents Visual MODFLOW Tutorial Drumco drumco vmf drumco Elevation 4 I drumco Bevation 5 g drumco Elevation 6 i VMod Imported Wells it Model Importing Conductiv
319. w display features may not immediately show up Please select Tools Restore System Settings Then save the project close and reload and this should correct the problem Also please note that Hydro GeoBuilder cannot open projects that have been modified and saved in VMOD Flex For more details please contact SWS Technical Support sws support slb com For more details refer to the Convert to Numerical Modellz48 section 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data 4 Working with Your Data The modeling workflows in VMOD Flex are data driven This means that you first need to load or create the appropriate data objects in order to use these at a particular step in the workflow See the following table for some common examples If you have First you should River locations in a Import these as Select this data object shapefile Polylinelsc data when creating a river objects boundary condition Geological layers in a Import these as Select these data Surfer GRD or ASCII Surfacels3 data objects when defining GRD objects horizons Air photo with river Import this as a Map Select this new polyline location imagelss data object when Then Create a new creating a river boundary Polylinel18 data object condition Digitize the polyline in a 2D Viewer XYZ points for Import these as Points Select these surfaces geological contacts 71 data objects when defining horizons Then Create or num
320. w the steps below e f you have not already done so create the Property Zone Using Polygon Data Object li98 as described above Select the Use Shapefile Attribute from the method combo box e Under Attribute column the combo box contains all the attributes of the specified polygon e Select the desired attribute from the combo box Once the property zone attributes have been defined click the Save button to create the property zone Once created the property zone is added to the Conceptual Model tree under the Properties node and under the appropriate parameter category node 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Conceptual Modeling Workflow 200 Conceptual Model 8 io Conceptual Modell C Model Boundary ce Structure et 7 6 Defining Boundary Conditions At this step define the boundary conditions for the conceptual model 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 201 VMOD Flex Help a9 File Tools Window Help Workflow AX D H a 00E E Data CE ground Define Modeling Objectives NextState layer2top Collect Data Objects layer2 bottom EJ Define Conceptual Mode O boundary EJ Define Model Structure ve fel Rate tn WG chd east EJ Define Property Zones o 150 WG chdwest S E Select the Next Step 30 175 OG wes oo 60 z200 I Define Surface Water Ne 30 150 E Define Pump
321. wing file types are supported for time schedule data Excel XLS Time schedule data can be imported using either an absolute or relative time format An example of an absolute time schedule is shown below Time River Stage 11 01 2008 16 18 11 15 2008 16 01 12 01 2008 16 12 12 15 2008 16 29 etc An example of a relative time schedule is shown below Starting Date 11 01 2008 Time days River Stage 0 16 18 15 16 01 30 16 12 45 16 29 etc To import time schedule data follow the steps below Right click in the Data Explorer and select Import Data from the pop up menu Select Time Schedule from the Data Type drop down list Click the button and locate the source file Enter a Name and a Description for the imported data and click Next to continue The next step allows you to preview the source data before importing and choose a subset of the source data e g a worksheet of an excel file Select which Excel worksheet to import from the Select Worksheet drop down list Also you can choose which row to import from using the From Row text field The next step involves selecting the type of time data used in the source file 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 109 VMOD Flex Help S Data Import Date and Time format in source Start date 8 17 2008 hd Date format Md Yyyy ad Start time 12 00 00 4M Time format h mm tt q Relative C A
322. without limit Accordingly care must be used to ensure that unrealistic flows into or out of the system do not develop during the simulation The leakance value may be physically based representing the conductance associated with an aquifer between the model area and a large lake or may be obtained through model calibration The leakance value C for the scenarios illustrated in the preceding figure may be calculated using the following formula Lx W xK D C where e LxW is the surface area of the grid cell face exchanging flow with the external source sink e K is the average hydraulic conductivity of the aquifer material separating the external source sink from the model grid e Dis the distance from the external source sink to the model grid When a General Head boundary condition is assigned the Use default leakance option is automatically selected If the Use default leakance option is selected the General Head boundary condition requires the following data e Stage The head value for the external source sink e Leakance A numerical parameter representing the resistance to flow between the boundary head and the model domain this field is read only and is calculated using formula described below e Distance to Reservoir The distance from the external source sink to the General Head grid cell e General Head Average Conductivity The average hydraulic conductivity of the aquifer material separating the external sour
323. ws to create a new Numerical Model workflow or Conceptual Model workflow When you select the appropriate item a new workflow window will load Help Menu Provides links to help topics webhelp and online resources The Just In Time Help will display a small help panel below most steps in the workflow window Customer Feedback will allow you to submit bugs and suggestions using an online form on www swstechnology com The About screen will show the version and build you are using along with your registration details name company serial number License Request will load a form where you can request a license Complete the form and submit this using the e mail address provided License Install will allow you to install a LIC file that you have received from SWS Technical support For more details on licensing please refer to the Getting Started Guide 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help 3 Quick Start Tutorials The following tutorials provide a brief introduction on how to use VMOD Flex The objective is not to teach you every detail but to familiarize you with basic principles and the way the program works The steps are intentionally kept brief so that you can actually start using the program as quickly as possible You are encouraged to explore the more detailed sections of the Help to further familiarize yourself In VMOD Flex there are two workflows you can follow Conceptual or Numerical Modeling
324. xt gt gt Cancel Heb e Click Next gt gt then Click Finish e The next step is to import a surface that represents ground surface e Click the Import Data button e Select Surface for the Data type e In the Source File field click the button and navigate to the My Documents folder then VMODFlex Tutorials ConceptualModel folder and select ground grd e Click Next gt gt through all the screens to accept the defaults then click Finish e Repeat these steps to import the remaining Surfaces layer2 top grd layer2 bottom grd e Next import polyline data objects and from the same source directory select chd east shp use all the defaults and finish the import e Repeat these steps for polylines importing first chd west shp then river shp e Once the data objects are imported they will appear in the tree on the left side of the program window 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 23 VMOD Flex Help File Tools Window Workfl Ladi Data G Data e Og layer2top poe 1 layer2 bottom ag chd east e You can view these data objects in 2D or 3D simply create a new viewer e Click on Window New 3D Window from the main menu an empty 3D Viewer will appear e Click on the check box beside each of the data objects you imported and they will appear in the 3D Viewer e Click Next Step to proceed where you will arrive at the Define Conceptual Model step Define Conce
325. you will see the model tree is populated in the bottom left corner of the screen from here you can show hide different model inputs outputs e You can add other data objects to the view such as an image Airphoto or other raw data polyline polygon shapefiles Just select the check box beside these objects in the Data Explorer e Click Next Step to proceed where you will arrive at the Grid view edit step View Edit Grid e Atthis step you can view the numerical grid in layer plan view cross sectional along row or column and 3D view e There are numerous tools available to control and manipulate the grid views 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services VMOD Flex Help View Imported Grid Views KP FSR OY v Layer Layer View 1 Row 1 amp Column 1 e 3D Toolbox e Under Views select the various views you want to see in the Flex viewer VMOD Flex allows you to simultaneously show a layer row column and 3D Views Place a check box beside the desired view and it will appear on the screen e Adjust a specific layer row or column using the up down arrows Alternatively click on the button then click on any specific row column or layer in any of the 2D views and the selected row column or layer will be set automatically e The standard navigation tools allow you to zoom pan and in the case of 3D view rotate e Click Next Step to proceed to the Properties step
326. ype of well data you selected in the previous step The following sections describe the data mapping for each data type option Well Heads Only e For importing Well Heads only you must map the following columns from the source data to the required target fields Well ID X Y Elevation Bottom e Well ID must be a unique value in the source data If not any rows containing duplicate Well IDs will not be imported 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Working with Your Data AE Data Import m Data Mapping Well heads Target_fields Map_to Unit category Unit Multiplier Data type Wellld None None None Text a Cs a S C aC C a C a e e a C a a e a xl M Source Data Preview well Name 14 28158 Wells Heads with Screens H Data Import loj x m Data Mapping Wellheads Screens Pump Schedule Target_fields l Unit category il Multiplier Data type E A C A S Ee C A A xl M Source Data Preview well Name 14 426158 lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Help 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services s VMOD Flex Help If this option is selected you must first map the well heads under the Well Heads tab Next click on the Screens tab and map the appropriate columns from the source data to the following target fields e Screen ID e Screen Bottom Z elevation of bottom of screen
327. z m s Constant iy 7E 06 EA e Property zones can also be defined using polygon shapes the values can also be defined from shapefile attributes or 2D Surface distributed values For more details please see Defining Property Zones he2 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services Quick Start Tutorials so e Click Next Step to proceed to the Selection screen e In this screen you can choose to proceed to Defining Boundary Conditions or proceed to Defining a grid or mesh e Click the Define Boundary Conditions button to proceed a File Tools Window Help Workflow 8x D H we O FI D Data gt A Dg ground Define Modeling Objectives Select the Next Step DA layer2top Collect Data Objects 1 layer2bottom Define Conceptual Model CHD OO boundary Define Model Structure EI chdeast Define Property Zones DR WG chd west EI Select the Next Step I WG rivers a Define Boundary Conditions i a In Define Boundary Conditions Select Grid Type Model Explorer SG Conceptual Mode 1 Model Boundary S Structure C Horizont C Horizon2 C Horizon3 S C Zones Zone1 Zone2 E Properties Conductivity i C Property Zone 1 L C Property Zone 2 H Simulation Domain C Mode Domain LG Boundary Conditions Concepts Model 30 Viewer 1 In this window you can choose the type of Boundary Conditions Standard MOD
328. zed data object In general data object settings consist of the following categories e General View data object metadata including source data information statistics native coordinate system field mappings view the attribute and geometry table e Operations Apply arithmetic and geometric operations to data object geometry and attributes e Style Settings Modify various style settings for different data object elements e g point line symbology show labels color rendering by attribute create isosurfaces set transparency etc e Data object settings can be accessed from the main VMOD Flex window To view the settings for a data object in the Data Explorer right click on the desired data object and select Settings from the pop up menu View Spreadsheet Export Delete Import Data Create Surface Create New Data Object New Folder 2D Viewer 3D Viewer aa This chapter presents information on the following topics 2012 by Schlumberger Water Services 6 1 Data Settings Viewing General Data Settings Viewing the Data Table Performing Operations on Data Modifying Data Style Settings General Settings General settings consist of data object meta data including the coordinate system field mappings and source data information General settings can be accessed by expanding the General node in the Settings tree The settings in each sub node are described below ini xi
329. zed polygon data objects or from generated structural zones e Assign property values for conductivity storage and initial heads using various methods Use a constant value Map to imported polygon shapefile attributes Map to imported 3D Gridded data attributes Use surface data object Boundary Modeling Automatically generate the simulation domain using the boundaries defined for the conceptual model Apply boundary conditions to the top bottom sides or an intermediate layer of the simulation model domain Support for the following boundary conditions e Pumping Wells e Specified Head e River e General Head e Drain e Recharge e Evapotranspiration e Lake e Specified Flux e Streams e For linear boundary conditions define local zones from line segments using an interactive 2D Viewer window e For linear boundary conditions define parameters at start end or intermediate vertices along a line and interpolate values between each vertex e Set each boundary condition parameter as static or transient e Define boundary condition parameters using one or more of the following methods e Use aconstant value e Map to imported shapefile attributes e Use a Surface data object e Use atime schedule data object for transient boundary conditions e Use attributes from 3D Gridded data objects Model Discretization e Discretize your model using the finite difference method or the finite element method 2012 by Schlumberger Wa

User Manual%>

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User Manual%&gt;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User Manual%>